NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router V200R005C10. Hardware Description. Issue 02 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router V200R005C10. Hardware Description. Issue 02 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD."

Transcription

1 V200R005C10 Issue 02 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

2 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Website: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen People's Republic of China support@huawei.com i

3 About This Document About This Document Related Version The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name NE05E&NE08E Version V200R005C10 Intended Audience This document describes the equipment structure, chassis structure, and board classification. This document also describes each board of these classes in details. This document helps you get the detailed information about the equipment hardware. This document is intended for: Network planning engineers Hardware installation engineers System maintenance engineers Symbol Conventions Symbol Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. ii

4 About This Document Symbol Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration. Command Conventions Convention Boldface Italic Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. [ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. { x y... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. [ x y... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. { x y... } * Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. [ x y... ] * Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. GUI Conventions Convention Boldface Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. > Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder. iii

5 About This Document Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues. Changes in This document has the following updates: New ETP4830-B1A2 Power System Deletion None Modification None Changes in Issue 01 ( ) This document is the first release of the V200R005C10 version. Compared with V200R005C00, this version has the following updates. New 6.9 NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board 6.10 NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board X.21 DTE Cable X.21 DCE Cable V.24 DTE Cable V.24 DCE Cable V.35 DTE Cable V.35 DCE Cable RS-232 Serial Interface Cable Standard Telephone Line Modification None Deletion None iv

6 Contents Contents About This Document...ii 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Appearance Functions and Features Panel NE05E-S2 Chassis Appearance Slot Distribution Installation Information Heat Dissipation NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Appearance Functions and Features Front Panel Installation Information Heat Dissipation NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Appearance Functions and Features Panel Installation Information Heat Dissipation NE08E-S6Chassis Appearance Slot Distribution Installation Information Heat Dissipation NE05E-S2 Boards NEC2CXPL - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit Front Panel...54 v

7 Contents Functions and Features CF Card and DIP Switch Technical Specifications NED1EG4T - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Electronic Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1EF8T - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Electric Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1EG2-2 Channels GE Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1EG4F - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1EF8F - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1MO1C - 8 Channels T1 Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Working Principle and Signal Flow Technical Specifications NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Working Principle and Signal Flow Jumper...98 vi

8 Contents Technical Specifications NED1AVD8A - 8 Channels ADSL2+ Service Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1AVD8B - 8 Channels VDSL2 Service Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1SHD4-4 Channels G.SHDSL Service Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications TNC1PIU - Power Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NEC1FAN - Fan Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications Filler Panel Appearance and Valid Slots Functions and Features NE08E-S6 Boards NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit Front Panel Functions and Features DIP Switch Technical Specifications NED2EM4T - 4 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2EM8T - 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2EM4F - 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features vii

9 Contents Technical Specifications NED2EM8F - 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2EM8M-4 Channels GE/FE Optical +4 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance NED2EX1S - 1 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2EX2S - 2 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2CQ1B - 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED2PQ1: 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Technical Specifications NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Working Principle and Signal Flow Specifications NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board Front Panel Functions and Features Working Principle and Signal Flow Jumper Specifications TND1PIU - Power Interface Board viii

10 Contents Front Panel Functions and Features Specifications AND1FAN - Fan Board Front Panel Functions and Features Specifications Filler Panel Appearance and Valid Slots Functions and Features Swappable Optical Modules Overview FE Optical Module GE Optical Module GE Optical Module GPON Optical Module Electrical Module Cables Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables DC Power Cables and Ground Cables AC Power Cables and Ground Cables Management Cables Alarm Input/Output Cables Clock Cables External Clock Cables Clock Bridging Cables Service Cables Ethernet Cables Ohm 8 x E1 Cables Ohm 8 x E1 Cables Ohm 16 x E1 Cables Ohm 16 x E1 Cables xdsl Cables X.21 DTE Cable X.21 DCE Cable V.24 DTE Cable V.24 DCE Cable V.35 DTE Cable V.35 DCE Cable RS-232 Serial Interface Cable Standard Telephone Line ix

11 Contents 9.6 Optical Fibers Equipment Support Cabinet Support APM30H Outdoor Cabinet IMB Network Cabinet inch Open Rack N63E Cabinet R01S100 Outdoor Cabinet R01S200 Outdoor Cabinet Power Distribution Equipment EPS AF Power System ETP AF Power System ETP4830-B1A2 Power System S48D Power System HW AC14D-1 Power System Lead-Acid Battery Quick Reference Indicators A Acronyms and Abbreviations x

12 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis About This Chapter This NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM is available in indoor and outdoor types. It is compact, light, and adaptive to various installation environments. 1.1 Appearance The NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. 1.2 Functions and Features The NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM can receive and process FE/GE service signals, implement service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface functions. 1.3 Panel There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E- SM panel. 1

13 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis 1.1 Appearance The NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. Indoor NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK Table 1-1 describes multiple models of the indoor NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK. Table 1-1 Description of the indoor NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK device models Device Model System Control Board Interface Board Switching Capacity PoE NE05E-SJ NEP1CXPC - 12 Gbit/s (6 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 6 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Not supported NE05E-SK NEP1CXPG - 12 Gbit/s (6 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 6 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Not supported The following figures show the appearance of an indoor NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK. Figure 1-1 Appearance of an indoor NE05E-SJ device Outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Table 1-2 describes multiple models of the outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM. 2

14 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Table 1-2 Description of the outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM device models Device Model System Control Board Interface Board Switching Capacity PoE NE05E-SL NEP1CXPD ANP1EM6C 12 Gbit/s (6 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 6 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) NE05E-SM NEP1CXPE - 8 Gbit/s (4 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 4 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Not supported Supported Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of an outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM. Figure 1-2 Appearance of an outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM device with the maintenance cover closed Device status indicators Maintenance cover Appearances of outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM devices configured with different boards are different in that they have different internal interfaces. 3

15 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis 1.2 Functions and Features The NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM can receive and process FE/GE service signals, implement service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface functions. Table 1-3 describes functions and features of the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E- SM. Table 1-3 Functions and features of the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Function and Feature Auxiliary interface function Description Provides one NM serial port or NM network port to communicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage and query the equipment. Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time to obtain the external clock/time information. (Only the NE05E-SK supports this function.) Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface provides three inputs of alarm digital parameters. (Only the NE05E-SM supports this function.) Ethernet interface function FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical modules, and GE electrical modules. FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s. NOTE Supports inloops and outloops. GE interfaces support flow control. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2. When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v Panel Appearance of the Panel There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E- SM panel. The following figures show the appearance of an indoor NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK. 4

16 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Figure 1-3 Appearance of an indoor NE05E-SJ device Ground point AC power input interface Device status Service electrical interfaces FE/GE0-FE/GE3 indicators Reset button Service SFP interfaces FE/GE2-FE/GE5 Electrical NM network SFP interface interface or interface status status indicators indicator NM serial interface Figure 1-4 Appearance of an indoor NE05E-SK device Ground point DC power input interface Device status indicators Reset button Time and Service electrical Clock input/ interfaces output interface FE/GE0-FE/GE3 Service SFP interfaces FE/GE2-FE/GE5 Electrical NM network SFP interface interface or interface status status indicators indicator NM serial interface The following figures show the appearance of an outdoor NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM device with the maintenance cover opened. NOTE The AC power interface provides two-channel access. If the two channels are both used for power input, they must use the same power supply. If one channel is used for power input and the other channel is used for NE05E cascading, a maximum of three NE05Es can be cascaded (in the case of NE05E-SM cascading with 110 V power supply, only two NE05E-SMs can be cascaded at most). 5

17 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Figure 1-5 Appearance of an outdoor NE05E-SL device with the maintenance cover opened 6

18 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Figure 1-6 Appearance of an outdoor NE05E-SM device with the maintenance cover opened Indicator The NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM provides the following indicators: System indicator PWR indicator, green, which indicates the power status STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ALM, red or orange, which indicates the alarm status. Interface indicator L/A, green or orange, which indicates the connection status/data transceiving status on the service interface. LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of a service port ACT indicator, orange, which indicates the receive/transmit status of a service port Button There is only one RST button on the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM for resetting the device. 7

19 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis The RST button can also be used to delete passwords and configuration files on the device. Once you press the RST button, the device starts to reset. Then you press and hold down the RST button 25s to 35s until the PWR, STA, and ALM indicators blink green. Then release the RST button so that the device starts to automatically delete passwords and configuration files. If you keep holding down the RST button (approximately 10s) until the three indicators are not blinking green simultaneously, the device only resets and does not delete the passwords and configuration files. Interface Table 1-4 describes the interfaces on the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM and their functions. Table 1-4 Interfaces on the NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Interface Name Interface Type Function Description about the Corresponding Cable ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface that can function as an NM interface or console interface For details, see 9.2 Management Cables. CLK (NE05E-SK) RJ-45 Clock input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. TOD (NE05E-SK) RJ-45 Time input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. ALMI/ALMO (NE05E-SM) RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface - FE/GE2-FE/GE5 (NE05E- SJ) FE/GE2-FE/GE5 (NE05E- SK) SFP FE/GE or GE service signal input/ output interface For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers or Ethernet Cables. GE0-GE1, FE/GE0-FE/GE3 (NE05E-SL) FE/GE0-FE/GE1 (NE05E- SM) FE/GE0-FE/GE3 (NE05E- SJ) RJ-45 FE/GE service signal input/output interface For details, see Ethernet Cables. FE/GE0-FE/GE3 (NE05E- SK) FE/GE2-FE/GE3 (NE05E- SL) FE/GE1-FE/GE3 (NE05E- SM) 8

20 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Pin Assignments Table 1-5 Pins for the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin Function 1 Transmit positive pole of the NM interface 2 Transmit negative pole of the NM interface Receive positive pole of the NM interface 4 Ground end of the console interface 5 Receive end of the console interface 6 Receive negative pole of the NM interface 7 Unspecified 8 Receive end of the console interface Table 1-6 Pins for the CLK interface Front View Pin Working Mode 1 Receive negative pole of the CLK interface Receive positive pole of the CLK interface 3 Unspecified 4 Transmit negative pole of the CLK interface 5 Transmit positive pole of the CLK interface 6 Unspecified 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified 9

21 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Table 1-7 Pins for the TOD interface Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1 PPS+Time Information) External Time Output (1 PPS+Time Information) 1 Unspecified Unspecified 2 Unspecified Unspecified Input negative pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) Output negative pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) 4 Ground end Ground end 5 Ground end Ground end 6 Input positive pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) 7 Input negative pole of time information (RS422 level) 8 Input positive pole of time information (RS422 level) Output positive pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) Output negative pole of time information (RS422 level) Output positive pole of time information (RS422 level) NOTE The TOD interface can work only in one mode. Table 1-8 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface Front View Pin Usage Input 1 for the digital parameter 1 4 Grounding end 5 Input 2 for the digital parameter 6 Grounding end 7 Input 3 for the digital parameter 10

22 1 NE05E-SJ/NE05E-SK/NE05E-SL/NE05E-SM Chassis Front View Pin Usage 8 Grounding end Table 1-9 Pins of the COM (RS485) interface Front View Pin Usage Transmit negative of the RS485 interface Transmit positive of the RS485 interface 7 Receive negative of the RS485 interface 8 Receive positive of the RS485 interface Table 1-10 Pins for the GE electrical interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1 2 Negative of twisted pair cable Positive of twisted pair cable 2 4 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 7 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 8 Negative of twisted pair cable 4 11

23 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis About This Chapter The NE05E-S2 uses the chassis of 1 U high (1 U = mm) and supports multiple installation modes, which facilitates flexible deployment. The NE05E-S2 can be flexibly deployed with high reliability and scalability. It has the following features: One power board provides two 48 V or 60 V DC power inputs, ensuring redundancy backup of input power. The fan board provides three fans, ensuring proper heat dissipation even when a fan is faulty. Two slots can be flexibly configured with service boards. 2.1 Appearance The NE05E-S2 provides six slots and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. 2.2 Slot Distribution This section describes slot distribution on the NE05E-S Installation Information NE05E-S2 provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE05E-S2 can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. 2.4 Heat Dissipation NE05E-S2 dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. 12

24 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis 2.1 Appearance The NE05E-S2 provides six slots and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the NE05E-S2 that has boards fully configured. Figure 2-1 Appearance of the NE05E-S2 that has boards fully configured Figure 2-2 shows the appearance of the NE05E-S2 that does not have boards fully configured. Figure 2-2 Appearance of the NE05E-S2 that does not have boards fully configured 2.2 Slot Distribution This section describes slot distribution on the NE05E-S2. Figure 2-3 shows the slot distribution on the NE05E-S2. Figure 2-3 Slot layout and bandwidth on the NE05E-S2 SLOT SLOT 6 5 SLOT 3 (2 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 4 (2 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 1 and SLOT 2 Table 2-1 describes priorities of slots where boards supported by the NE05E-S2 can be inserted. 13

25 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis Table 2-1 Priorities of available slots Name Valid Slot Priorities of Slots (in Descending Order) NEC2CXPL slot 1 and slot 2 - NED1EF8T/NED1EF8F NED1EG2 NED1EG4T/NED1EG4F slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 > slot 4 NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B slot 3 or slot 4 slot 4 > slot 3 NED1MO1C slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 > slot 4 NED1AVD8A/ NED1AVD8B NED1SHD4/NED1SHD4I slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 > slot 4 NED1SA8 slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 > slot 4 NED1MPAA slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 > slot 4 NEC1PIU slot 5 - NEC1FAN slot 6 - Note: The NEC2CXPI or NEC2CXPL house two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one NEC2CXPL. 2.3 Installation Information NE05E-S2 provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE05E-S2 can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. As shown in Table 2-2, NE05E-S2 supports various mounting ears and can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. 14

26 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis Table 2-2 Requirements on the cabinet and mounting ears Mounting Ear Applicable Cabinet Standard Applicable Huawei Cabinet Remarks IEC60297 N66E N68E N610E The mounting ears are delivered with the device. 19-inch open rack IMB network cabinet APM30H outdoor cabinet ETSI N63E N66T The mounting ears are rack-mounting ears that are installed on the mounting ears delivered with the device. IEC60297 (23- inch) - The mounting ears are for a 23-inch cabinet and are used to substitute for the mounting ears delivered with the device when the device needs to be installed in a 23- inch cabinet. NE05E-S2 provides three installation positions for mounting ears. Users can determine an installation position for mounting ears based on the depth of the cabinet. Figure 2-4 shows the installation positions of mounting ears. Position 1 shows a pair of mounting ears delivered with NE05E-S2. 15

27 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis Figure 2-4 Installation positions of mounting ears Already installed mounting ears Position 3 for installing the mounting ears Position 1 for installing the mounting ears Position 2 for installing the mounting ears Determine an installation position for mounting ears based on the cabinet depth. The following figures show the installation dimensions when mounting ears are installed in different positions. Figure 2-5 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (IEC) Unit: mm

28 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis Figure 2-6 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (ETSI) Unit: mm

29 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis Figure 2-7 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (23-inch) Unit: mm NOTE When installing the NE05E-S2 in the cabinet, reserve 80 mm space at the front of the panel for cabling. 2.4 Heat Dissipation NE05E-S2 dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. Figure 2-8 shows the system air duct. 18

30 2 NE05E-S2 Chassis Figure 2-8 NE05E-S2 Air duct Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NE05E-S2 must be kept clean and unblocked. A distance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on NE05E- S2 to ensure good ventilation. Filler panels must be installed on unused slots. In addition, on NE05E-S2, heat must be dissipated by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. The ambient temperature of NE05E-S2 must be within the range of -20 C to +60 C. When NE05E-S2 is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of NE05E- S2. 19

31 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis About This Chapter The NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI uses the chassis of 1 U high (1 U = mm) and supports multiple installation modes, which facilitates flexible deployment. NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI supports flexible deployment and high reliability: Each DC NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH supports two channels of -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs. These two channels back up each other. NE05E-SI draws air for heat dissipation has three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the other fans still work to dissipate heat. NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH uses natural heat dissipation has no fans and boasts higher reliability and zero noise. 3.1 Appearance The NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. 3.2 Functions and Features The NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI can receive and process E1, FE, and GE service signals, implement service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface functions. 3.3 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI panel. 3.4 Installation Information NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. 3.5 Heat Dissipation NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. 20

32 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis 3.1 Appearance The NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. Table 3-1 describes multiple models of the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI. Table 3-1 Description of the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI models Model/ Silkscreen Builtin Contro l Board Power Suppl y Interface Temperature 1588 ACR POE NE05E-SI NEF2C XPA AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ FE(E) -20ºC to +65ºC (fan cooling) Not supported Supported NE05E-SG NEF1C XPF DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE (COMBO) -40ºC to 65ºC (natural heat dissipation) Not supported Not supported NE05E-SH NEF1C XPG DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE (COMBO)+16E1-40ºC to 65ºC (natural heat dissipation) Not supported Not supported NOTE l (O) indicates an SPF cage. l (E) indicates an RJ-45 electrical interface. l (COMBO) indicates a COMBO interface. The following figures show the appearance of the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI. Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NE05E-SI AC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E) Figure 3-2 Appearance of the NE05E-SG with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE (COMBO) 21

33 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Figure 3-3 Appearance of the NE05E-SH with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE (COMBO)+16E1 3.2 Functions and Features The NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI can receive and process E1, FE, and GE service signals, implement service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface functions. Table 3-2 describes functions and features of the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI. Table 3-2 Functions and features of the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Function and Feature Description Switching capability 24 Gbit/s (12 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 12 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Auxiliary interface function Provides one NM serial port or NM network port to communicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage and query the equipment. Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time to obtain the external clock/time information. Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface provides three inputs of alarm digital parameters. Ethernet interface function FE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules and FE electrical modules. GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules and GE electrical modules. FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical modules, and GE electrical modules. FE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s. 22

34 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Function and Feature Description Supports inloops and outloops. GE interfaces support flow control. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. E1 interface function Supports a 75-ohm or 120-ohm impedance value (based on the actual E1 cable) NOTE Supports the E1 and CE1 modes. Supports the master/slave clock mode. Supports the HDB3 line coding (unconfigurable). Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 interface in the receive/transmit direction. Supports the ATM, TDM, and PPP protocols. If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2. When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v Front Panel Panel Appearance There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI panel. Figure 3-4 shows the appearance of the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI panel. 23

35 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Figure 3-4 Appearance of the NE05E-SH panel (NE05E-SH used as an example) PWR STAT ALM ETH/OAM CLK FE/GE24-FE/GE27 E1(8-15) RST GE16-GE19 TOD ALMI/ALMO COMBO FE/GE20-FE/GE23 E1(0-7) Indicator The NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI provides the following indicators: System indicator PWRA and PWRB are green indicators indicating status of the first and second power inputs. When PWRA/PWRB is on and green, power has been accessed. PWR indicator, green, which indicates the power status STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ALM, red or orange, which indicates the alarm status. Interface indicator LINK/ACT, green or orange, which indicates the connection status/data transceiving status on the SFP interface. LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of a service port ACT indicator, orange, which indicates the receive/transmit status of a service port Button There is only one RST button on the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI for resetting the device. The RST button can also be used to delete passwords and configuration files on the device. Once you press the RST button, the device starts to reset. Then you press and hold down the RST button 25s to 35s until the PWR, STA, and ALM indicators blink green. Then release the RST button so that the device starts to automatically delete passwords and configuration files. If you keep holding down the RST button (approximately 10s) until the three indicators are not blinking green simultaneously, the device only resets and does not delete the passwords and configuration files. Interface Table 3-3 describes the interfaces on the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI and their functions. 24

36 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Table 3-3 Interfaces on the NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Interface Name Interface Type Function Description about the Corresponding Cable ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface that can function as an NM interface or console interface For details, see 9.2 Management Cables. CLK RJ-45 Clock input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. TOD RJ-45 Time input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. ALMI/O RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface - GE SFP GE service signal input/output interface FE/GE SFP FE/GE service signal input/ output interface FE/GE RJ-45 FE/GE service signal input/ output interface E1 Anea 96 E1 service signal input/output interface For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers or Ethernet Cables. For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers or Ethernet Cables. For details, see Ethernet Cables. For details, see Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and Ohm 16 x E1 Cables. NOTE The SFP interface can connect to cables only after an optical module or an electrical module is installed. The NE05E-SH device's E1 interface type is DB44. For information about cables to the E1 interface, see Ohm 8 x E1 Cables and Ohm 8 x E1 Cables. Pin Assignments Table 3-4 Pins for the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin Function 1 Transmit positive pole of the NM interface 2 Transmit negative pole of the NM interface Receive positive pole of the NM interface 4 Ground end of the console interface 5 Receive end of the console interface 25

37 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Front View Pin Function 6 Receive negative pole of the NM interface 7 Unspecified 8 Receive end of the console interface Table 3-5 Pins for the CLK interface Front View Pin Working Mode 1 Receive negative pole of the CLK interface 2 Receive positive pole of the CLK interface Unspecified 4 Transmit negative pole of the CLK interface 5 Transmit positive pole of the CLK interface 6 Unspecified 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified Table 3-6 Pins for the TOD interface Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1 PPS+Time Information) External Time Output (1 PPS+Time Information) 1 Unspecified Unspecified 2 Unspecified Unspecified Input negative pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) Output negative pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) 4 Ground end Ground end 5 Ground end Ground end 6 Input positive pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) Output positive pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) 26

38 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1 PPS+Time Information) 7 Input negative pole of time information (RS422 level) 8 Input positive pole of time information (RS422 level) External Time Output (1 PPS+Time Information) Output negative pole of time information (RS422 level) Output positive pole of time information (RS422 level) NOTE The TOD interface can work only in one mode. Table 3-7 Pins for the ALMI/ALMO interface Front View Pin Function 1 Boolean input 2 Ground end Boolean input 4 Boolean input 5 Ground end 6 Ground end 7 Boolean output positive pole 8 Boolean output negative pole Table 3-8 Pins for the GE electrical interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1 2 Negative of twisted pair cable Positive of twisted pair cable 2 4 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 27

39 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Front View Pin Usage 6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 7 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 8 Negative of twisted pair cable 4 Table 3-9 Pins for the FE interface Front View Pin Function 1 Positive pole of twisted pair cable 1 2 Negative pole of twisted pair cable Positive pole of twisted pair cable 2 4 Unspecified 5 Unspecified 6 Negative pole of twisted pair cable 2 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified Table 3-10 Pins of the Anea 96 interface Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage 1 R x 0 25 T x R x 1 27 T x R x 2 29 T x R x 3 31 T x R x 4 33 T x R x 5 35 T x 5 28

40 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage R x 6 37 T x R x 7 39 T x R x 8 41 T x R x 9 43 T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x Installation Information NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. As shown in Table 3-11, NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI supports various mounting ears and can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. 29

41 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Table 3-11 Requirements on the cabinet and mounting ears Mounting Ear Applicable Cabinet Standard Applicable Huawei Cabinet Remarks IEC60297 N66E N68E N610E The mounting ears are delivered with the device. 19-inch open rack IMB network cabinet APM30H outdoor cabinet ETSI N63E N66T The mounting ears are rack-mounting ears that are installed on the mounting ears delivered with the device. IEC60297 (23- inch) - The mounting ears are for a 23-inch cabinet and are used to substitute for the mounting ears delivered with the device when the device needs to be installed in a 23- inch cabinet. 3.5 Heat Dissipation NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. NE05E-SG and NE05E-SH use the natural heat dissipation mode while the other models dissipate heat by blowing air from left to right. Figure 3-5 shows the NE05E-SI air duct. 30

42 3 NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI Chassis Figure 3-5 NE05E-SI air duct Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NE05E-SI must be kept clean and unblocked. A clearance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on NE05E- SI to ensure good ventilation. When NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH/NE05E-SI. For details about temperature range by each product model, see 3.1 Appearance. NE05E-SG/NE05E-SH devices that use the natural heat dissipation mode cannot be stacked, and a 1 U clearance must be reserved between them. 31

43 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis About This Chapter The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF uses the chassis of 1 U high (1 U = mm) and supports multiple installation modes, which facilitates flexible deployment. The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF can be flexibly deployed with high reliability. It has the following features: The DC NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF provides two 48 V or 60 V DC power inputs, ensuring redundancy backup of input power. The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF provides three fans, ensuring proper heat dissipation even when a fan is faulty. 4.1 Appearance The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. 4.2 Functions and Features The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF can receive and process FE, GE, 10GE, and E1 service signals, implement service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface functions. 4.3 Panel There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF panel. 4.4 Installation Information NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. 4.5 Heat Dissipation NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. 32

44 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis 4.1 Appearance The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. Table 4-1 describes multiple models of the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF. Table 4-1 Description of the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF models Silkscreen Built-in Control Board Interface 1588 ACR NE05E-SF NEG1CXPA 2x10GE(O)+8xGE/FE(O)+8xFE/GE(E)+16E1 Supported NE05E-SE NEG1CXPB 2x10GE(O)+16xGE/FE(O)+8xFE/GE(E) Not supported NOTE l (O) indicates an XFP interface for 10GE services or an SFP interface for GE/FE services. l (E) indicates an RJ-45 electrical interface. Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 show the appearance of the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF of different models. Figure 4-1 Appearance of the NE05E-SF with interfaces 2x10GE(O)+8xFE/GE(O)+8xFE/GE (E)+16E1 Figure 4-2 Appearance of the NE05E-SE with interfaces 2x10GE(O)+16xFE/GE(O)+8xFE/GE (E) 33

45 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis 4.2 Functions and Features The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF can receive and process FE, GE, 10GE, and E1 service signals, implement service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface functions. Table 4-2 describes functions and features of the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF. Table 4-2 Functions and features of the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Function and Feature Switching capability Auxiliary interface function Description 88 Gbit/s (44 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 44 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Provides one NM serial port or NM network port to communicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage and query the equipment. Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time to obtain the external clock/time information. Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface provides three inputs of alarm digital parameters. Ethernet interface function FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, GE optical modules, and GE electrical modules. 10GE XFP interfaces support 10GE optical modules. FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. GE interfaces support flow control. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. E1 interface function Supports a 75-ohm or 120-ohm impedance value (based on the actual E1 cable) Supports the E1 and CE1 modes. Supports the master/slave clock mode. Supports the HDB3 line coding (unconfigurable). Supports inloops and outloops. 34

46 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Function and Feature Description NOTE Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 interface in the receive/transmit direction. Supports the ATM, TDM, and PPP protocols. If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2. When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v Panel Appearance of the Panel There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF panel. Figure 4-3 uses NE05E-SF as an example to show the panels of NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF. Figure 4-3 Appearance of the NE05E-SF panel Indicator The NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF provides the following indicators: System indicator PWRA and PWRB are green indicators indicating status of the first and second power inputs. When PWRA/PWRB is on and green, power has been accessed. PWR indicator, green, which indicates the power status STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status 35

47 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis ALM, red or orange, which indicates the alarm status. Interface indicator LINK/ACT, green or orange, which indicates the connection status/data transceiving status on the SFP interface and XFP interface. LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of a service port ACT indicator, orange, which indicates the receive/transmit status of a service port Button There is only one RST button on the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF for resetting the device. The RST button can also be used to delete passwords and configuration files on the device. Once you press the RST button, the device starts to reset. Then you press and hold down the RST button 10s to 12s until all the LINK/ACT indicators blink. Then release the RST button so that the device starts to automatically delete passwords and configuration files. If you keep holding down the RST button (approximately 10s) until the LINK/ACT indicators are not blinking simultaneously, the device only resets and does not delete the passwords and configuration files. Interface Table 4-3 describes the interfaces on the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF and their functions. Table 4-3 Interfaces on the NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Interface Name Interface Type Function Description about the Corresponding Cable ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface that can function as an NM interface or console interface For details, see 9.2 Management Cables. CLK RJ-45 Clock input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. TOD RJ-45 Time input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. ALMI/ ALMO RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface - OUT32 IN32 OUT33 IN33 (NE05E- SF) XFP 10GE service signal input/ output interface For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. 36

48 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Interface Name Interface Type Function Description about the Corresponding Cable OUT24 IN24 OUT25 IN25 (NE05E- SE) FE/GE16 FE/ GE23 (NE05E- SF) SFP FE/GE service signal input/ output interface For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers or Ethernet Cables. FE/GE0 FE/GE15 (NE05E- SE) FE/GE23 FE/ GE31 (NE05E- SF) RJ-45 FE/GE service signal input/ output interface For details, see Ethernet Cables. FE/GE16 FE/ GE23 (NE05E- SE) E1 (0 15) (NE05E- SF) DB44 E1 service signal input/output interface For details, see Ohm 8 x E1 Cables and Ohm 8 x E1 Cables. NOTE The SFP interface can connect to cables only after an optical module or an electrical module is installed. The XFP interface can connect to cables only after an optical module is installed. 37

49 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Pin Assignments Table 4-4 Pins for the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin Function 1 Transmit positive pole of the NM interface 2 Transmit negative pole of the NM interface Receive positive pole of the NM interface 4 Ground end of the console interface 5 Receive end of the console interface 6 Receive negative pole of the NM interface 7 Unspecified 8 Receive end of the console interface Table 4-5 Pins for the CLK interface Front View Pin Working Mode 1 Receive negative pole of the CLK interface Receive positive pole of the CLK interface 3 Unspecified 4 Transmit negative pole of the CLK interface 5 Transmit positive pole of the CLK interface 6 Unspecified 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified 38

50 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Table 4-6 Pins for the TOD interface Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1 PPS+Time Information) External Time Output (1 PPS+Time Information) 1 Unspecified Unspecified 2 Unspecified Unspecified Input negative pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) Output negative pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) 4 Ground end Ground end 5 Ground end Ground end 6 Input positive pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) 7 Input negative pole of time information (RS422 level) 8 Input positive pole of time information (RS422 level) Output positive pole of 1 PPS signals (RS422 level) Output negative pole of time information (RS422 level) Output positive pole of time information (RS422 level) NOTE The TOD interface can work only in one mode. Table 4-7 Pins for the ALMI/ALMO interface Front View Pin Function 1 Boolean input 2 Ground end Boolean input 4 Boolean input 5 Ground end 6 Ground end 7 Boolean output positive pole 39

51 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Front View Pin Function 8 Boolean output negative pole Table 4-8 Pins for the GE electrical interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1 2 Negative of twisted pair cable Positive of twisted pair cable 2 4 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 7 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 8 Negative of twisted pair cable 4 Table 4-9 Pins of the DB44 interface Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage 1 38 R0 15 T R1 14 T R2 13 T R3 12 T R4 11 T R5 10 T R6 9 T6 40

52 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage R7 8 T Installation Information NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. As shown in Table 4-10, NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF supports various mounting ears and can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. Table 4-10 Requirements on the cabinet and mounting ears Mounting Ear Applicable Cabinet Standard Applicable Huawei Cabinet Remarks IEC60297 N66E N68E N610E The mounting ears are delivered with the device. 19-inch open rack IMB network cabinet APM30H outdoor cabinet ETSI N63E N66T The mounting ears are rack-mounting ears that are installed on the mounting ears delivered with the device. IEC60297 (23- inch) - The mounting ears are for a 23-inch cabinet and are used to substitute for the mounting ears delivered with the device when the device needs to be installed in a 23- inch cabinet. 41

53 4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF Chassis 4.5 Heat Dissipation NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. Figure 4-4 shows the system air duct. Figure 4-4 NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF air duct Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF must be kept clean and unblocked. A clearance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on NE05E- SE/NE05E-SF to ensure good ventilation. The ambient temperature of NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF must be within the range of -40 C to +65 C. When NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the permitted temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of NE05E-SE/NE05E-SF. 42

54 5 NE08E-S6Chassis 5 NE08E-S6Chassis About This Chapter The NE08E-S6 uses the chassis of 2 U high (1 U = mm) and supports multiple installation modes, which facilitates flexible deployment. The NE08E-S6 can be flexibly deployed with high reliability and scalability. It has the following features: Two power boards are supported for redundancy protection. Two control boards are supported for redundancy protection. The fan board provides six fans, ensuring proper heat dissipation even when a fan is faulty. Six slots can be flexibly configured with service boards. 5.1 Appearance The NE08E-S6 provides 11 slots and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. 5.2 Slot Distribution This section describes slot distribution on the NE08E-S Installation Information NE08E-S6 provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE08E-S6 can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. 5.4 Heat Dissipation NE08E-S6 dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. 43

55 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 5 NE08E-S6Chassis 5.1 Appearance The NE08E-S6 provides 11 slots and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks. Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the NE08E-S6 that has boards fully configured. Figure 5-1 Appearance of the NE08E-S6 that has boards fully configured Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the NE08E-S6 that does not have boards fully configured. Figure 5-2 Appearance of the NE08E-S6 that does not have boards fully configured 5.2 Slot Distribution This section describes slot distribution on the NE08E-S6. Figure 5-3 shows the slot layout and bandwidth of the NE08E-S6 equipped with the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE board. 44

56 5 NE08E-S6Chassis Figure 5-3 Slot layout and bandwidth of the NE08E-S6 equipped with NED2CXPB/ NED2CXPE SLOT 10 SLOT 9 SLOT 11 SLOT 7 SLOT 8 SLOT 5 (1 x 10Gbit/s / 4 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 6 (1 x 10Gbit/s / 4 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 3 (1 x 10Gbit/s / 4 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 4 (1 x 10Gbit/s / 4 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 1 (2 x 10Gbit/s / 8 x 1Gbit/s) SLOT 2 (2 x 10Gbit/s / 8 x 1Gbit/s) NOTE The NED2EM8T/NED2EM8F board applies when the slot bandwidth is 8x1Gbit/s. When working with the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE control board, the board can be channelized to use 1x10Gbit/s slot bandwidth and inserted in any slot among slots 1 to 6. Table 5-1 describes priorities of slots where boards supported by the NE08E-S6 can be inserted. Table 5-1 Priorities of available slots Name Valid Slot Priorities of Slots (in Descending Order) NED2CXPB/ NED2CXPE Slot 7, slot 8 Two slots must be configured with the same control board. slot 7 > slot 8 NED2EM4T/ NED2EM4F NED2EM8T/ NED2EM8F/ NED2EM8M NED2CQ1B NED2PQ1 slot 1 to slot 6 slot 3 > slot 4 > slot 1 > slot 2 > slot 5 > slot 6 slot 1 to slot 6 slot 1 > slot 2 > slot 3 > slot 4 > slot 5 > slot 6 slot 1 to slot 6 slot 3 > slot 4 > slot 1 > slot 2 > slot 5 > slot 6 NED2EX1S slot 1 to slot 6 slot 5 > slot 6 > slot 3 > slot 4 > slot 1 > slot 2 NED2EX2S slot 1 to slot 6 slot 1 > slot 2 NED3ML1A/ NED3ML1B slot 1 to slot 6 slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 3 > slot 5 > slot 2 > slot 1 NED1SA8 slot 1 to slot 6 slot 3 > slot 4 > slot 1 > slot 2 > slot 5 > slot 6 NED1MPAA slot 1 to slot 6 slot 3 > slot 4 > slot 1 > slot 2 > slot 5 > slot 6 NED1PIU Slot 9, slot 10 - NED1FAN slot 11-45

57 5 NE08E-S6Chassis 5.3 Installation Information NE08E-S6 provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various mounting ears, so NE08E-S6 can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. As shown in Table 5-2, NE08E-S6 supports various mounting ears and can be installed in multiple types of cabinets. Table 5-2 Requirements on the cabinet and mounting ears Mounting Ear Applicable Cabinet Standard Applicable Huawei Cabinet Remarks IEC60297 N66E N68E N610E The mounting ears are delivered with the device. 19-inch open rack IMB network cabinet APM30H outdoor cabinet ETSI N63E N66T The mounting ears are rack-mounting ears that are installed on the mounting ears delivered with the device. IEC60297 (23- inch) - The mounting ears are for a 23-inch cabinet and are used to substitute for the mounting ears delivered with the device when the device needs to be installed in a 23- inch cabinet. NE08E-S6 provides three installation positions for mounting ears. Users can determine an installation position for mounting ears based on the depth of the cabinet. Figure 5-4 shows the installation positions of mounting ears. Position 1 shows a pair of mounting ears delivered with NE08E-S6. 46

58 5 NE08E-S6Chassis Figure 5-4 Installation positions of mounting ears Already installed mounting ears Position 3 for installing the mounting ears Position 1 for installing the mounting ears Position 2 for installing the mounting ears Determine an installation position for mounting ears based on the cabinet depth. The following figures show the installation dimensions when mounting ears are installed in different positions. 47

59 5 NE08E-S6Chassis Figure 5-5 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (IEC) Unit: mm

60 5 NE08E-S6Chassis Figure 5-6 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (ETSI) Unit: mm

61 5 NE08E-S6Chassis Figure 5-7 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (23-inch) Unit: mm NOTE When installing the NE08E-S6 in the cabinet, reserve 80 mm space at the front of the panel for cabling. 5.4 Heat Dissipation NE08E-S6 dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. 50

62 5 NE08E-S6Chassis Figure 5-8 shows the system air duct. Figure 5-8 NE08E-S6 Air duct Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NE08E-S6 must be kept clean and unblocked. A distance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on NE08E- S6 to ensure good ventilation. Filler panels must be installed on unused slots. In addition, on NE08E-S6, heat must be dissipated by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right. When NE08E-S6 is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of NE08E- S6. 51

63 6 NE05E-S2 Boards 6 NE05E-S2 Boards About This Chapter Boards on NE05E-S2 are used together to provide various functions. 6.1 NEC2CXPL - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit The NEC2CXPL (CXPL for short) is a control, cross-connect, and protocol processing board. The function version of the NEC2CXPL is NEC2. The NEC2CXPL is housed in slots 1 and NED1EG4T - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Electronic Interface Board The NED1EG4T board (EG4T for short) is a 4 channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board whose functional version is NED1. The NED1EG4T board can be housed in any of slots 3 and 4 in the chassis. 6.3 NED1EF8T - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Electric Interface Board The NED1EF8T (EF8T for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet electric interface board. The function version of the EF8T is NED1. The EF8T is housed in slot 3 or slot NED1EG2-2 Channels GE Optical Interface Board The NED1EG2 (EG2 for short) is a two channels GE optical interface board. The function version of the EG2 is NED1. The NED1EG2 is housed in slot 3 or slot NED1EG4F - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Optical Interface Board The NED1EG4F (EG4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive optical interface board. The function version of the EG4F is NED1. The NED1EG4F is housed in slot 3 or slot NED1EF8F - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Optical Interface Board The NED1EF8F (EF8F for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet optical interface board. The function version of the EF8F is NED1. The NED1EF8F is housed in slot 3 or slot NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board The NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B (ML1A/ML1B for short) is a 16 channels E1 interface board. The function version of the ML1A/ML1B is NED2. The NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B is housed in slot 3 or slot NED1MO1C - 8 Channels T1 Interface Board The NED1MO1C (MO1C for short) is an 8-channel electrical interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1MO1C can be housed in slot3, slot4. 52

64 6 NE05E-S2 Boards 6.9 NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board An NED1SA8 (SA8 for short) is an 8 channels synchronous/asynchronous serial interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1SA8 can be installed in an -S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E-S6's any slot from 1 to NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board An NED1MPAA (MPAA for short) is a 10 channels multi-protocol interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1MPAA can be installed in an NE05E-S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E- S6's any slot from 1 to NED1AVD8A - 8 Channels ADSL2+ Service Interface Board The NED1AVD8A (AVD8A for short) is an 8-channel ADSL2+ service interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1AVD8A can be housed in slot3, slot NED1AVD8B - 8 Channels VDSL2 Service Interface Board The NED1AVD8B (AVD8B for short) is an 8-channel VDSL2 service interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1AVD8B can be housed in slot 3 or NED1SHD4-4 Channels G.SHDSL Service Interface Board The NED1SHD4 (SHD4 for short) is a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1SHD4 can be housed in slot3, slot TNC1PIU - Power Interface Board The TNC1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is TNC1. The PIU is housed in slot NEC1FAN - Fan Board The NEC1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is NEC1. The FAN is housed in slot Filler Panel A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis. 53

65 6 NE05E-S2 Boards 6.1 NEC2CXPL - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multiprotocol Process Unit The NEC2CXPL (CXPL for short) is a control, cross-connect, and protocol processing board. The function version of the NEC2CXPL is NEC2. The NEC2CXPL is housed in slots 1 and Front Panel On the front panel of the NEC2CXPL, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-1 shows the appearances of the front panels of the NEC2CXPL. Figure 6-1 Appearance of the front panel of the NEC2CXPL Indicators Buttons The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NEC2CXPL: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status SRV indicator, which is reserved for later use CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms GE L/A0 to GE L/A1, FE L/A0 to FE L/A3 indicators, orange or green, which indicate the connection status of the port NOTE Five pairs of Link and ACT indicators located above ETH/OAM interfaces and four FE service interfaces on the NEC2CXPL, which indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. The following buttons are present on the front panel of the NEC2CXPL: RST button, which is used for warm reset of the board. When you press the RST button and then release it, the board is reset (warm). 54

66 6 NE05E-S2 Boards CF RCV button, which is used to restore the configuration data from the CF card. When you hold down the CF RCV button for five seconds, the equipment automatically restores the configuration data from the CF card. LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, except the service port indicators on the NED1EF8T, NED1EF8F, NED1AVD8A, NED1SHD4, all the board indicators on the NE are on. Interfaces Table 6-1 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NEC2CXPL. Table 6-1 Interfaces on the NEC2CXPL Board Interface Name Interface Type Usage Corresponding Cable NEC2CXPL ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface for NM network port or NM serial port For details, see 9.2 Management Cables. NEC2CXPL CLK0/ TOD0 CLK1/ TOD1 RJ-45 External time/clock input/output interface For details, see 9.4 Clock Cables. NEC2CXPL ALMI/O RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface - NEC2CXPL GE0, GE1 SFP Input/output interface for GE optical/ electrical signals For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers and Ethernet Cables. NEC2CXPL FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 SFP Input/output interface for FE/GE optical signals For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers and Ethernet Cables. NEC2CXPL FE/GE4 to FE/GE7 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE/GE electrical signals For details, see Ethernet Cables. Table 6-2 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Transmit positive of the NM network port 2 Transmit negative of the NM network port Receive positive of the NM network port 4 Grounding end of the NM serial port 5 Receive end of the NM serial port 6 Receive negative of the NM network port 55

67 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Front View Pin Usage 7 Unspecified 8 Transmit end of the NM serial port Table 6-3 Pins of the CLK0/TOD0 and CLK1/TOD1 interfaces Front View Pin Working Mode External Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information) 1 Receive negative of the CLK Unspecified Unspecified Receive positive of the CLK Unspecified Unspecified 3 Unspecified Input negative for the 1PPS signal (RS422 level) Output negative for the 1PPS signal (RS422 level) 4 Transmit negative of the CLK 5 Transmit positive of the CLK Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end 6 Unspecified Input positive for the 1PPS signal (RS422 level) 7 Unspecified Input negative for the time information (RS422 level) 8 Unspecified Input positive for the time information (RS422 level) Output positive for the 1PPS signal (RS422 level) Output negative for the time information (RS422 level) Output positive for the time information (RS422 level) NOTE The CLK0/TOD0 and CLK1/TOD1 interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding three working modes. 56

68 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-4 Pins of the ALMI/O interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Input for the digital parameter 2 Grounding end Input for the digital parameter 4 Input for the digital parameter 5 Grounding end 6 Grounding end 7 Positive output for the digital parameter 8 Negative output for the digital parameter Table 6-5 Description of the SFP interface Interface on the Front Panel Supported Modules Interface Type Usage GE0, GE1 GE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for GE optical signals GE electrical interface RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals FE/GE0 to FE/ GE3 FE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for FE optical signals GE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for GE optical signals GE electrical interface RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals NOTE The GE SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module; when the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module. 57

69 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-6 Pins of the GE electrical interface (FE/GE4 to FE/GE7) Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair 1 2 Negative of twisted pair Positive of twisted pair 2 4 Positive of twisted pair 3 5 Negative of twisted pair 3 6 Negative of twisted pair 2 7 Positive of twisted pair 4 8 Negative of twisted pair Functions and Features The NEC2CXPL transmits, accesses and processes FE/GE signals, grooms services, performs the system control, processes the system clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces. Table 6-7 lists the functions and features of the NEC2CXPL. Table 6-7 Functions and features of the NEC2CXPL Function and Feature Basic function Description Switching capability 24 Gbit/s (12 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 12 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Provides four FE/GE electrical interfaces, four FE/GE SFP interfaces, and two GE SFP interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Auxiliary interface function Provides one NM serial port or NM network port to communicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage and query the equipment. Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time to obtain the external clock/time information. Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface provides three inputs of alarm digital parameters. 58

70 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Ethernet interface function Description GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules and GE electrical modules. FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical modules, and GE electrical modules. NOTE FE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. GE interfaces support the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2. When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v CF Card and DIP Switch A board has a set of DIP switches and a hot-swappable CF card. CF Card and DIP Switch Locations Figure 6-2 shows the locations of the CF card and DIP switches on NEC2CXPL. 59

71 ON DIP NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Figure 6-2 Locations of the CF card and DIP switches on NEC2CXPL. CF Card DIP Switch CF Card The size of the CF card on NEC2CXPL is 512 MB. The CF card is used to backup data and load packages. DIP Switch NOTICE This operation should be executed with caution. Use it under the guidance of technical personnel. After the configuration file is deleted, reset the DIP switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0. In this way, you do not need to delete the configuration file at each startup. The numeral indicates 1, and the letter indicates 0. The device password is deleted when the configuration file is deleted. You can use the DIP switches to delete the configuration file loaded on the device. Set DIP switches on NEC2CXPL to 1, 1, 0, and 1. During startup, the device deletes the loaded configuration file based on the DIF switch status.after the password is deleted, you are required to enter a new password when a PC is connected to the device through the console interface. 60

72 6 NE05E-S2 Boards NOTE If no PC is connected to the device through the console interface, you can check whether the password is deleted based on the indicator status. The password is deleted at the stage when the BIOS is guiding the upper-layer software during the device startup. At this stage, the green PROG indicator is on for 300 ms and off for 300 ms. To reset the DIP switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0, you are advised to remove the board after the STAT and PROG indicators become green Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NEC2CXPL cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Interface Specifications For the specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface, see Table 6-8. For the specifications of the swappable GE optical/electrical modules supported at a GE (SFP) interface, see Table 6-10 and Table For the specifications of the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported at an FE/GE (SFP) interface, see Table 6-9, Table 6-10, Table 6-11, and Table NOTE The specifications of an SFP interface on a board depend on the optical/electrical module on the board. For the specifications of the optical/module modules on a board, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 6-8 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE and enterprise regulations. Table 6-9 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km 61

73 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Table 6-10 Information about GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial S esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber esfp, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km bidirectional CWDM esfp, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial esfp, 1521nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1551nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1571nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1591nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1611nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx 1570 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1570 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km 62

74 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-11 Information about FE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m Table 6-12 Information about GE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, Auto Negotiate, 100 m Other Specifications Board dimensions (mm): 20.3 (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Board weight: 1.08 kg(2.38 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): 28.0 (NEC2CXPI), 29.5 (NEC2CXPL) 6.2 NED1EG4T - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Electronic Interface Board Front Panel The NED1EG4T board (EG4T for short) is a 4 channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board whose functional version is NED1. The NED1EG4T board can be housed in any of slots 3 and 4 in the chassis. On the front panel of the NED1EG4T board, there are one indicator and four interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-3 shows the front panel of the NED1EG4T board. Figure 6-3 Appearance of the front panel Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1EG4T board: 63

75 6 NE05E-S2 Boards STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port NOTE There are four LINK indicators and eight ACT indicators. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicator are present above each FE/GE service interface. For details on the meaning of the indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces On the NED1EG4T board, four interfaces are present. Table 6-13 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. Table 6-13 Types and usage of interfaces on the NED1EF4T Interface on the Front Panel Interfac e Type Usage Pin Corresponding Cable FE/GE0- FE/GE3 RJ-45 Input/output interfaces for FE/GE electrical signals For details, see Table 6-14 and Table For details, see9.5.1 Ethernet Cables. Table 6-14 Pins for the FE electrical interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1 2 Negative of twisted pair cable Positive of twisted pair cable 2 4 Unspecified 5 Unspecified 6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified 64

76 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-15 Pins for the GE electrical interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair cable Negative of twisted pair cable 1 3 Positive of twisted pair cable 2 4 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 7 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 8 Negative of twisted pair cable Functions and Features The NED1EG4T provides four FE/GE service interfaces (two groups) and works with the control board to transmit, receive, and process four FE/GE electrical services. Table 6-16 lists the functions and features of the NED1EG4T board. Table 6-16 Functions and features of the NED1EG4T board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides four FE/GE electrical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports the master/slave port mode. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. 65

77 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Clock Description Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v2. On the front panel of the NED1EG4T, the first two FE/GE interfaces are considered as one group and the other two FE/GE interfaces on the back are considered as another group. The service access ability of the NED1EG4T is 2 Gbit/s and that of each interface group is 1 Gbit/s. The two interfaces of each group share the group bandwidth Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Technical specifications of the NED1EG4T board include interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 6-17 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the NED1EG4T board. Table 6-17 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE and enterprise regulations. Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (height) x (depth) x (width)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.50(1.10 lb) Power consumption at room temperature (W): NED1EF8T - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Electric Interface Board The NED1EF8T (EF8T for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet electric interface board. The function version of the EF8T is NED1. The EF8T is housed in slot 3 or slot 4. 66

78 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Front Panel On the front panel of the NED1EF8T, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1EF8T. Figure 6-4 Font panel of the NED1EF8T Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1EF8T: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port NOTE There are eight LINK indicators and eight ACT indicators. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicator are present above each FE service interface. For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interface Table 6-18 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED1EF8T. Table 6-18 Types and usage of interfaces on the NED1EF8T Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Pin Correspondin g Cable FE0 - FE7 RJ45 Input/output interfaces for FE electrical signals For details, see Table For details, see Ethernet Cables. NOTE The FE0 to FE7 interfaces support auto-adaptation to a straight-through cable or a crossover cable. 67

79 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-19 Pins of the RJ45 connector of the NED1EF8T Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair 1 2 Negative of twisted pair Positive of twisted pair 2 4 Unspecified 5 Unspecified 6 Negative of twisted pair 2 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified Functions and Features The NED1EF8T mainly transmits/accesses 8 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services with the control board. Table 6-20 lists the functions and features of the NED1EF8T. Table 6-20 Functions and features of the NED1EF8T Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides eight FE electrical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v2/IEEE 1588 ACR. 68

80 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Technical Specifications Interface Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1EF8T include the interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 6-21 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the NED1EF8T. Table 6-21 Specifications of the FE electrical interface Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE and enterprise regulations. Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.53(1.17 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): NED1EG2-2 Channels GE Optical Interface Board Front Panel The NED1EG2 (EG2 for short) is a two channels GE optical interface board. The function version of the EG2 is NED1. The NED1EG2 is housed in slot 3 or slot 4. On the front panel of the NED1EG2, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-5 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1EG2. Figure 6-5 Front panel of the NED1EG2 Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1EG2. 69

81 6 NE05E-S2 Boards STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK0 to LINK1 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port ACT0 to ACT1 indicators, yellow, which indicate the data transceiving status of the port For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces Two SFP interfaces are present on the NED1EG2. Table 6-22 list the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED1EG2. Table 6-22 Types and usage of optical interfaces on the NED1EG2 Interface on the Front Panel Interf ace Type Usage Correspond ing Fiber Optical module IN0, IN1 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. OUT0, OUT1 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE optical signal Functions and Features The NED1EG2 mainly transmits/receives 2 x GE signals, and processes the services with the control board. Table 6-23 lists the functions and features of the NED1EG2. Table 6-23 Functions and Features of the NED1EG2 Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides two GE interfaces (SFP). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports only GE optical modules. 70

82 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Description Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1EG2 include the interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications For information about the swappable optical modules supported by SFP interfaces on the NED1EG2 board, see Table The interface specifications depend on the optical modules on the board. For details on the optical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 6-24 Information about GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial S esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber esfp, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km bidirectional CWDM esfp, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial esfp, 1521nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1551nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1571nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1591nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1611nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber bidirectional 71

83 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Commercial esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx 1570 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1570 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) (0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.) Weight (kg): 0.52(1.15 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): NED1EG4F - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Optical Interface Board The NED1EG4F (EG4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive optical interface board. The function version of the EG4F is NED1. The NED1EG4F is housed in slot 3 or slot Front Panel On the front panel of the NED1EG4F, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1EG4F. Figure 6-6 Appearance of the front panel of the NED1EG4F 72

84 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1EG4F: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status L/A0 to L/A3 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/receive status For details on indications of the indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces There are four SFP interfaces on the NED1EG4F. Table 6-25 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. Table 6-25 Types and usage of interfaces on the NED1EG4F Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Correspo nding Cable Optical module IN0 to IN3 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the FE/GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. OUT0 to OUT3 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the FE/GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the FE/GE optical signal. Electrical module OUT0 IN0, OUT3 IN3 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For details, see Ethernet Cables. NOTE The GE SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module; when the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module. 73

85 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Functions and Features The NED1EG4F provides four FE/GE service interfaces (two groups). The NED1EG4F is used with the control board to transmit, receive, and process four channels of FE/GE optical services. Table 6-26 lists the functions and features of the NED1EG4F. Table 6-26 Functions and features of the NED1EG4F Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides four FE/GE interfaces (SFP). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical modules, GE electrical modules. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE On the front panel of the NED1EG4F, the first two FE/GE interfaces are considered as one group and the other two FE/GE interfaces on the back are considered as another group. The service access ability of the NED1EG4F is 2 Gbit/s and that of each interface group is 1 Gbit/s. The two interfaces of each group share the group bandwidth. If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2/IEEE 1588 ACR Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1EG4F include the interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications For information about the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported by SFP interfaces on the NED1EG4F board, see Table 6-27, Table 6-28, Table 6-29, Table 6-29, and Table The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the optical/electrical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. 74

86 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-27 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Table 6-28 Information about GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial S esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber esfp, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km bidirectional CWDM esfp, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial esfp, 1521nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1551nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1571nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1591nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1611nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km 75

87 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx 1570 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1570 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Table 6-29 Information about FE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m Table 6-30 Information about GE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, Auto Negotiate, 100 m Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) (0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.) Weight (kg): 0.50 (1.10 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): NED1EF8F - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Optical Interface Board Front Panel The NED1EF8F (EF8F for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet optical interface board. The function version of the EF8F is NED1. The NED1EF8F is housed in slot 3 or slot 4. On the front panel of the NED1EF8F, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1EF8F. 76

88 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Figure 6-7 Font panel of the NED1EF8F Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1EF8F: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK0 to LINK7 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces Eight SFP interfaces are present on the NED1EF8F. Table 6-31 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. Table 6-31 Interfaces of the NED1EF8F Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Corresponding Fiber IN0 - IN7 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the FE optical signal. For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. OUT0 - OUT7 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the FE optical signal. NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module. When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time Functions and Features The NED1EF8F mainly transmits/receives 8 x FE optical signals, and processes the services with the control board. 77

89 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-32 lists the functions and features of the NED1EF8F. Table 6-32 Functions and features of the NED1EF8F Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports eight FE interfaces (SFP). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports FE optical modulesand FE electrical modules. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v Technical Specifications Interface Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1EF8F include the interface specifications and physical specifications. For information about the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported by SFP interfaces on the NED1EF8F board, see Table 6-33 and Table The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the optical/electrical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 6-33 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional 78

90 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Commercial Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Table 6-34 Information about FE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) (0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.) Weight (kg): 0.55(1.21 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board The NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B (ML1A/ML1B for short) is a 16 channels E1 interface board. The function version of the ML1A/ML1B is NED2. The NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B is housed in slot 3 or slot 4. NOTE Front Panel The mapping impedance of an interface on the NED2ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interface on the NED2ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of the NED2ML1A and NED2ML1B are the same. On the front panel of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearances of the Front Panel Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the appearances of the front panel of the NED2ML1A/ NED2ML1B. Figure 6-8 Front panels of the NED2ML1A 79

91 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Figure 6-9 Front panels of the NED2ML1B Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B. Table 6-35 lists the type and usage of the interfaces Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and Ohm 16 x E1 Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces. Table 6-35 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage NED2ML1A NED2ML1B 0-15 Anea ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the zero to fifteenth channels of E1 services. 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the zero to fifteenth channels of E1 services. Table 6-36 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface. Table 6-36 Pins of the Anea 96 interface Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage 1 R x 0 25 T x R x 1 27 T x R x 2 29 T x 2 80

92 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage R x 3 31 T x R x 4 33 T x R x 5 35 T x R x 6 37 T x R x 7 39 T x R x 8 41 T x R x 9 43 T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x

93 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Functions and Features NED2ML1A is a 75-ohm E1 board and the NED2ML1B is a 120-ohm E1 board. The NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B must be used with the system control board to access and process 16 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP are supported. Table 6-37 lists the functions and features of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B. Table 6-37 Functions and features of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B Function and Feature Basic function Remarks Provides 16 E1 interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Impedance supported by the interface NED2ML1A: 75 ohms NED2ML1B: 120 ohms Supports the E1 and CE1 modes. Supports the master/slave clock mode. Supports the HDB3 line coding (unconfigurable). Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 interface in the receive/transmit direction. ATM Number of supported ATM E1 services Number of supported IMA groups Maximum number of E1 links in each IMA group Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N- to-1 (N 32) or 1-to-1 format. Supports the ATM bundle function. Number of supported PVCs/ PVPs Number of supported local ATM CCCs Number of supported remote ATM PWE3s

94 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature TDM Remarks Supports CES services in CESoPSN and SAToP modes. Supports the timeslot compression function. For services in CESoPSN mode, a minimum of 1 timeslots can be bundled during serial port configuration. Supports the fractional E1. Different timeslots of an E1 can be bound to different CES PWs. PPP Number of supported local TDM CCCs Number of supported remote TDM PWE3s Number of supported PPP links Number of supported ML- PPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B include the interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications Table 6-38 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B. Table 6-38 Specifications of the interfaces on the NED2ML1A/NED2ML1B Item Specification Requirement Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048 Interface impedance Interface code 75 ohms (ML1A) 120 ohms (ML1B) HDB3 Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G.703 Attenuation tolerance of the input interface at the point with a frequency of 1024 khz (db) 0 to 6 83

95 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Item Anti-interference capability of the input interface Specification Requirement Complies with ITU-T G.703 Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823 Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.44(0.97 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): NED1MO1C - 8 Channels T1 Interface Board The NED1MO1C (MO1C for short) is an 8-channel electrical interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1MO1C can be housed in slot3, slot Front Panel On the front panel of the NED1MO1C board, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1MO1C board. Figure 6-10 Appearance of the front panel Indicator Port Name The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1MO1C board: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status For details on the meaning of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Table 6-39 lists the number of interfaces, types, and usage of the interfaces on the NED1MO1C board. 84

96 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-39 Interfaces on the NED1MO1C board Interfac e on the Front Panel Interfac e Type Usage Pin Required Cable T1 0-T1 7 RJ-45 Input/output interfaces for T1 electrical signals For details, see Table Table 6-40 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the NED1MO1C board Front View Pin No. Usage 1 Transmit positive TTip 2 Transmit negative TRing Unspecified 4 Receive positive RTip 5 Receive negative RRing 6 Unspecified 7 Grounding terminal 8 Grounding terminal Functions and Features The NED1MO1C board receives 8 x T1 signals and works with the system control board to process the received signals. The NED1MO1C board supports various service types, including CES and ML-PPP. Table 6-41 lists the functions and features of the NED1MO1C board. Table 6-41 Functions and features of the NED1MO1C board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides eight T1 interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports the 100 ohm impedance. 85

97 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Description Supports the TDM and PPP protocols. Supports the T1 and CT1 modes. Supports the master/slave clock mode. Supports the AMI and B8ZS line coding. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports PRBS tests in framed or unframed mode for T1 interfaces in both the transmit and receive directions. TDM Supports CES services in CESoPSN and SAToP modes. Number of supported local TDM CCCs Number of supported remote TDM PWE3s 4 8 PPP Number of supported PPP links 8 Number of supported ML-PPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group 8 8 Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Technical specifications of the NED1MO1C board include interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 6-42 lists the specifications of interfaces on the NED1MO1C board. Table 6-42 Specifications of interfaces on the NED1MO1C board Item Nominal bit rate Interface impedance Code Specification 1544 kbit/s 100 ohm B8ZS Pulse shape at output port Compliant with ITU-T G

98 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Item Anti-interference capability of input port Specification Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Input jitter tolerance Compliant with ITU-T G.824 Output jitter Compliant with ITU-T G.824 Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (height) x (depth) x (width) Weight (kg): 0.59(1.30 lb) Power consumption at room temperature (W): NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board An NED1SA8 (SA8 for short) is an 8 channels synchronous/asynchronous serial interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1SA8 can be installed in an -S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E-S6's any slot from 1 to Front Panel Panel Appearance An NED1SA8 has indicators and interfaces on its panel. Figure 6-11 shows the appearance of an NED1SA8's panel. Figure 6-11 NED1SA8 panel appearance Indicator An NED1SA8 provides the following indicators: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status SA indicator, green or orange, which indicates interface service status For indicator description, see 11.1 Indicators. 87

99 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Interface An NED1SA8 provides eight DB28 interfaces. Table 6-43 describes the interface types and functions. Table 6-43 NED1SA8 interfaces Panel Interface Interface Type Function Fiber/Cable X.21/V.24/ V.35 DB28 Used for X.21/V.24/V.35 signal input X.21 DTE Cable X.21 DCE Cable V.24 DTE Cable V.24 DCE Cable V.35 DTE Cable V.35 DCE Cable Table 6-44 describes the pins on a DB28 interface. Table 6-44 DB28 interface pins Front View Pin Function Description Pos.1 1 TXD+ Transmit data 2 TXD- 3 TXC+ Transmit clock 4 TXC- 5 Unspecified - Pos.28 6 GND Signal ground 7 MODE0 X.21/V.24/V.35 mode control 8 MODE1 9 MODE2 10 MODE_DCE/DTE DCE/DTE mode control 11 DCD+ Digital carrier detector 12 DCD- 13 RTS+ Request to send 14 RTS- 15 TXCE+ Transmit clock of an external device 88

100 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Front View Pin Function Description 16 TXCE- 17 RXC+ Receive clock 18 RXC- 19 RXD+ Received data 20 RXD- 21 GND Shield 22 LL Local loopback 23 CTS+ Clear to send 24 CTS- 25 DSR+ Data set ready 26 DSR- 27 DTR+ Data terminal ready 28 DTR Functions and Features An NED1SA8 receives 8 channels of synchronous or asynchronous services and processes these services with the control board. NE lists the functions and features of an NED1SA8. Table 6-45 NED1SA8 functions and features Function and Feature Basic function and feature Description Provides eight synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Allows the serial interfaces to set to X.21, V.24, or V.35 interfaces. Supports the DTE and DCE working modes. Supports hot swap. Supports temperature and voltage detection. X.21 interface Supports synchronous and asynchronous modes. Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50 in asynchronous mode. V.24 interface Supports synchronous and asynchronous modes. 89

101 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Description Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50 in asynchronous mode. V.35 interface Supports the synchronous mode Working Principle and Signal Flow An NED1SA8 consists of interfaces, a multiprotocol transceiver, an FPGA module, clock module, and power module. Figure 6-12 shows the function block diagram of an NED1SA8. Figure 6-12 NED1SA8 function block diagram AND1SA8 Backplane DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 Multiprotocol Transceiver Data Clock Control FPGA module GE Active/ standby signal selection CLK Control CXP CXP CXP Clock module Power module -48V/-60V PIU -48V/-60V PIU In the Receive Direction An NED1SA8 receives X.21/V.24/V3.5 signals (including data, clock, and control signals) through the DB28 interfaces on its panel. The multiprotocol transceiver matches these signals and converts them into transistor-transistor logic (TTL) signals. After the signals arrive at the FPGA module, the FPGA module completes PCM processing and performs multi-channel multiplexing to send the data to the control board over E1 PWE3. In the Transmit Direction An NED1SA8 accepts the service data from the control board, extracts the E1 signals from the FPGA module for demultiplexing, identifies the target interfaces, converts the data to TTL signals, and sends the signals to the multiprotocol transceiver. After the signals arrive, the multiprotocol transceiver converts the TTL signals to signals that comply with interface protocol requirements and sends the signals out through the DB28 interfaces on the panel. 90

102 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Multiprotocol Transceiver FPGA Module Clock Module Power Module The multiprotocol transceiver supports the following functions: Interface signal match Conversion from various signals to TTL signals Interface loopback The FPGA module completes the following functions: PCM processing on signals E1 frame multiplexing and demultiplexing PWE3 The clock module provides a working clock for modules on the NED1SA8. The power module supplies DC power to modules on the NED1SA Technical Specifications Interface Specifications The technical specifications of an NED1SA8 include interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 6-46 lists the NED1SA8's interface specifications. Table 6-46 NED1SA8's interface specifications Item Synchronous X.21 interface Asynchronous X.21 interface Synchronous V.24 interface Asynchronous V.24 interface Synchronous V.35 interface Rate (bit/s) N x 64 kbit/s (N 31) 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or kbit/s or 128 kbit/s 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or N x 64 kbit/s (N 31) 91

103 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Physical Specifications Dimensions (H x W x D): mm x mm x mm (0.80 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.89 in.) Weight: 0.48 kg Power consumption (normal room temperature): 18 W Operating ambient temperature: -5ºC to +55ºC (23ºF to 131ºF) 6.10 NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board An NED1MPAA (MPAA for short) is a 10 channels multi-protocol interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1MPAA can be installed in an NE05E-S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E- S6's any slot from 1 to Front Panel An NED1MPAA has indicators and interfaces on its panel. Panel Appearance Figure 6-13 shows the appearance of an NED1MPAA's panel. Figure 6-13 NED1MPAA panel appearance Indicator An NED1MPAA provides the following indicators: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status For indicator description, see 11.1 Indicators. Interface An NED1MPAA provides two RS-232 interfaces, two RS-485/RS-422 interface, two E&M interfaces, and four FXS/FXO interfaces. Table 6-47 describes the interface types and functions. 92

104 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-47 NED1MPAA interfaces Panel Interface Interface Type Function Fiber/Cable RS232 0 and RS232 2 RS485 1 and RS485 3 RJ-45 (RS232 0 and RS485 1 share an RJ-45 interface, and RS232 2 and RS485 3 share another RJ-45 interface) Used for RS-232 signal input Used for RS-485/RS-422 signal input RS-232 Serial Interface Cable Must be made on site based on the interface type of the remote device EM4 and EM5 RJ-45 Used for E&M service relay Must be made on site based on the interface type of the remote device FXSO6- FXSO9 RJ-11 Used as an FXS interface for simulating a subscriber's line interface and for normal analog phone and fax machine access Used as an FXO interface (functioning as a loop trunk interface) for PSTN access Standard Telephone Line. Table 6-48 describes RS232 RS485 interface pins. Table 6-48 RS232 RS485 interface pins Front View Pin Function (RS232) Function (RS485 Half-Duplex) Function (RS422/ RS485 Full- Duplex) Unspecified Receive and transmit positive pole of the RS-485 interface 2 Unspecified Receive and transmit negative pole of the RS-485 interface Transmit positive pole of the RS-485 interface Transmit negative pole of the RS-485 interface 3 RS-232 interface's transmit end Unspecified Unspecified 93

105 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Front View Pin Function (RS232) Function (RS485 Half-Duplex) Function (RS422/ RS485 Full- Duplex) 4 Unspecified RS-485 interface's ground terminal RS-485 interface's ground terminal 5 RS-232 interface's ground terminal 6 RS-232 interface's receive end Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified 7 Unspecified Unspecified Receive positive pole of the RS-485 interface 8 Unspecified Unspecified Receive negative pole of the RS-485 interface Table 6-49 describes the pins on an E&M interface. Table 6-49 EM interface pins Front View Pin Definition Function 1 SB Used for outputting isolated signal power E Used for a PBX to receive control signaling 3 R1 2-wire mode: not connected 4-wire mode: RING sending 4 R 2-wire mode: RING 4-wire mode: RING receiving 5 T 2-wire mode: TIP 4-wire mode: TIP receiving 6 T1 2-wire mode: not connected 4-wire mode: TIP sending 7 M Used for a PBX to transmit control signaling 8 SG Isolated signal ground 94

106 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-50 describes FXSO interface pins. Table 6-50 FXSO interface pins Front View Pin Function 1 Unspecified 2 Unspecified 3 TIP RING 5 Unspecified 6 Unspecified Functions and Features An NED1MPAA receives RS-232, RS-482, E&M, FXS, and FXO services and processes these services with the control board. NE lists the functions and features of an NED1MPAA. Table 6-51 NED1MPAA functions and features Function and Feature Basic function and feature Description Provides two RS-232 interfaces, two RS-485 interfaces, two E&M interfaces, and four FXS/FXO interfaces. Supports hot swap. Supports temperature and voltage detection. RS-232 interface Supports only the asynchronous mode. Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50. RS-485 interface Supports RS485 (half-duplex) or RS422/RS485 (full-duplex). Supports only the asynchronous mode. Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50 in asynchronous mode. E&M Supports 2-wire and 4-wire working modes. Supports E&M relay. FXSO Can function as an FXS or FXO interface. An FXS interface supports analog phone and fax machine access. 95

107 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Description An FXO support public switched telephone network (PSTN) access. Supports Z interface extension Supports the hotline phone function Working Principle and Signal Flow An NED1MPAA consists of interfaces, an RS-232 module, RS-485 module, FXS/FXO module, E&M module, FPGA module, clock module, and power module. Figure 6-14 shows the function block diagram of an NED1MPAA. Figure 6-14 NED1MPAA function block diagram AND1MPAA Backplane RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-11 RJ-11 RJ-11 RJ-11 RS-232 RS-232 RS-485 RS-485 E&M E&M FXS/FXO FXS/FXO FXS/FXO FXS/FXO RS-232 module RS-485 module E&M module FXS/ FXO module FPGA 模块 GE Active/ standby signal selection CLK Control CXP CXP CXP Clock module Power module -48V/-60V PIU -48V/-60V PIU In the Receive Direction An NED1MPAA provides multi-protocol access services through interfaces on its panel. The RS-232 module converts the signals on RS-232 serial interfaces to TTL signals. The RS-485 module converts the signals on RS-485 serial interfaces to TTL signals. The E&M module completes E&M signaling and voice signaling detection and converts the signals to PCM signals. The FXS/FXO module completes voice signal processing and converts the signals to PCM signals. After the signals arrive at the FPGA module, the FPGA module completes PCM processing on TTL signals sent from the RS-232 and RS-485 modules, performs multi-channel multiplexing, and uses the E1 PWE3 mode to send the data to the control board over the backplane GE channel. 96

108 6 NE05E-S2 Boards In the Transmit Direction RS-232 Module RS-485 Module E&M Module FXS/FXO Module FPGA Module Clock Module Power Module An NED1MPAA accepts the service data from the control board, extracts the E1 signals from the FPGA module for demultiplexing, identifies the target interfaces, and sends the signals to the RS-232, RS-485, FXS/FXO, and E&M modules after processing. These modules then process and convert the signals to those that comply with interface protocol requirements and finally send the signals out through the interfaces on the panel. The RS-232 module completes the following functions: Interface signal match Conversion from differential signals to TTL signals The RS-485 module completes the following functions: Interface signal match Conversion from differential signals to TTL signals The E&M module completes the following functions: E&M signal receive, detection, report, and transmission Conversion from voice signals to PCM signals The FXS/FXO module completes the following functions: Conversion from voice signals to PCM signals The FPGA module completes the following functions: PCM processing on signals E1 frame multiplexing and demultiplexing PWE3 The clock module provides a working clock for modules on the NED1MPAA. The power module supplies DC power to modules on the NED1MPAA. 97

109 J21 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Jumper Jumpers are used to set the working modes of RS485 interfaces on an NED1MPAA. Jumper Position Figure 6-15 shows the jumper positions on an NED1MPAA. Figure 6-15 Jumper positions on an NED1MPAA Jumper J20 An NED1MPAA has two RS485 interfaces on its panel. The J20 jumper is used by the RS485 1 interface and the J21 jumper is used by the RS485 3 interface. Jumper RS485 1 and RS485 3 interfaces support the RS-485 half-duplex mode or RS-422/RS-485 fullduplex mode. In former mode, when an RS485 1 or RS485 3 interface resides at the beginning or end of a connection on a topology, the jumper must be in the short-circuit state (the jumper cap retained). In other situations, the jumper must be in the open-circuit state (the jumper cap removed) Technical Specifications The technical specifications of an NED1MPAA include interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications Table 6-52 lists the interface specifications of the NED1MPAA. 98

110 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-52 Interface specifications of the NED1MPAA. Item Rate (bit/s) RS , 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or RS , 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 48000, or N x 64 kbit/s (N 8) RS , 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 48000, or N x 64 kbit/s (N 8) E&M FXS/FXO 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Physical Specifications Dimensions (H x W x D): mm x mm x mm (0.80 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.89 in.) Weight: 0.49 kg Power consumption (normal room temperature): 12 W Operating ambient temperature: -5ºC to +55ºC (23ºF to 131ºF) 6.11 NED1AVD8A - 8 Channels ADSL2+ Service Interface Board Front Panel Front Panel The NED1AVD8A (AVD8A for short) is an 8-channel ADSL2+ service interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1AVD8A can be housed in slot3, slot4. On the front panel of the NED1AVD8A, there are indicators and interfaces. Figure 6-16 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1AVD8A. Figure 6-16 Front panel of the NED1AVD8A Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1AVD8A. 99

111 6 NE05E-S2 Boards STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status NOTE There are eight LINK indicators, which are present above each service interface. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces There are eight ADSL2+ interfaces on the front panel of the NED1AVD8A. Table 6-53 lists types and usage of these interfaces. Table 6-53 Interfaces on the NED1AVD8A Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Cable DSL0-DSL7 RJ-45 Accesses ADSL2+ service signals. For details, see xdsl Cables. Table 6-54 lists the pins of DSL1-DSL8 interfaces. Table 6-54 Pins of DSL0-DSL7 interfaces Front View Pin Description 1 Unspecified 2 Unspecified Unspecified 4 TIP 5 RING 6 Unspecified 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified Functions and Features The NED1AVD8A is an 8-channel ADSL2+ service interface board. The NED1AVD8A on the network side must work with the control board to access and process ADSL2+ services. In addition, the NED1AVD8A supports the ADSL2+ bundling function. Table 6-55 lists functions and features of the NED1AVD8A. 100

112 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-55 Functions and features of the NED1AVD8A Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides eight ADSL2+ interfaces. Used on the NNI side. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Provides 4 binding groups. Supports the ETHoA-LLC and ETHoA-VCMUX modes. Supports two xdsl protocol modes: Annex A and Annex M. (The xdsl protocol mode is unconfigurable. The protocol mode configured on the DSLAM applies.) NOTE The following groups of ADSL2+ ports are present on the board: Group 1: port 0 and port 1 Group 2: port 2 and port 3 Group 3: port 4 and port 5 Group 4: port 6 and port Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1AVD8A include performance specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-56 lists the performance specifications of the NED1AVD8A. Table 6-56 Specifications of the ADSL2+ interfaces Interface Max. Uplink Rate Max. Downlink Rate Max. Transmission Distance ADSL Mbit/s 24 Mbit/s 6.5 km Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.50(1.10 lb) Power consumption at room temperature (W):19.6 W 101

113 6 NE05E-S2 Boards 6.12 NED1AVD8B - 8 Channels VDSL2 Service Interface Board The NED1AVD8B (AVD8B for short) is an 8-channel VDSL2 service interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1AVD8B can be housed in slot 3 or Front Panel Front Panel On the front panel of the NED1AVD8B, there are indicators and interfaces. Figure 6-17 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1AVD8B. Figure 6-17 Front panel of the NED1AVD8B Indicators Interfaces The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED1AVD8B. STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status NOTE There are eight LINK indicators, which are present above each service interface. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. There are eight VDSL2 interfaces on the front panel of the NED1AVD8B. Table 6-57 lists types and usage of these interfaces. Table 6-57 Interfaces on the NED1AVD8B Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Cable DSL0-DSL7 RJ-45 Accesses VDSL2 service signals. For details, see xdsl Cables. Table 6-58 lists the pins of DSL1-DSL8 interfaces. 102

114 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Table 6-58 Pins of DSL0-DSL7 interfaces Front View Pin Description 1 Unspecified 2 Unspecified Unspecified 4 TIP 5 RING 6 Unspecified 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified Functions and Features The NED1AVD8B is an 8-channel VDSL2 service interface board. The NED1AVD8B on the network side must work with the control board to access and process VDSL2 services. In addition, the NED1AVD8B supports the VDSL2 bundling function. Table 6-59 lists functions and features of the NED1AVD8B. Table 6-59 Functions and features of the NED1AVD8B Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides eight VDSL2 interfaces. Used on the NNI side. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Provides 4 binding groups. Supports Vectoring. Supports Annex B protocol mode. NOTE The following groups of VDSL2 ports are present on the board: Group 1: port 0 and port 1 Group 2: port 2 and port 3 Group 3: port 4 and port 5 Group 4: port 6 and port 7 103

115 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1AVD8B include performance specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-60 lists the performance specifications of the NED1AVD8B. Table 6-60 Specifications of the VDSL2 interfaces Interface Max. Uplink Rate Max. Downlink Rate Max. Transmission Distance VDSL2 50 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s 3.5 km Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.50(1.10 lb) Power consumption at room temperature (W):19.6 W 6.13 NED1SHD4-4 Channels G.SHDSL Service Interface Board The NED1SHD4 (SHD4 for short) is a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, whose functional version is NED1. The NED1SHD4 can be housed in slot3, slot Front Panel On the front panel of the NED1SHD4, there are indicators, and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-18 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED1SHD4. Figure 6-18 Appearance of the front panel of the NED1SHD4 Indicators STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK0/LINK1/LINK2/LINK3 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. 104

116 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Interfaces Table 6-61 lists the types of the interfaces on the NED1SHD4 and their respective usage. Table 6-61 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED1SHD4 Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Corresponding Cable SHDSL0 - SHDSL3 RJ-11 Accesses the first 4 x G.SHDSL services. For details, see xdsl Cables. Table 6-62 lists the pins of theshdsl0 - SHDSL3 interfaces. Table 6-62 Pins of the SHDSL0 - SHDSL3 interfaces on the NED1SHD4 Front View Pin No. Usage 1 Unspecified 2 Unspecified 3 TIP RING 5 Unspecified 6 Unspecified Functions and Features Used with the control board, the NED1SHD4 can process the G single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (G.SHDSL) service. Table 6-63 lists the functions and features of the NED1SHD4. Table 6-63 Functions and features of the NED1SHD4 Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces. Used on the NNI side. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports one binding group. 105

117 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Function and Feature Description Supports the ATM mode and the EFM mode. Supports the extended attributes compliant with the ITU-T G bis in ATM mode. Supports the NTR clock. NOTE The NED1SHD4 supports one binding group. When the NED1SHD4 is in ATM mode, interface binding needs to be manually configured. When the NED1SHD4 is in EFM mode, the device automatically adapts to the interface binding configuration on the DSLAM Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1SHD4 cover the performance specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-64 lists the performance specifications of the NED1SHD4. Table 6-64 Specifications of the interfaces on the NED1SHD4 Interface Max. Upstream Rate Max. Downstream Rate Max. Four-Line Bundling Rate Max. Transmission Distance G.SHDSL 5.7 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 23 Mbit/s 5.25 km Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.60(1.32 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): TNC1PIU - Power Interface Board The TNC1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is TNC1. The PIU is housed in slot Front Panel On the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, power supply interfaces, and a label. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. 106

118 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Figure 6-19 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the PIU. PWRA and PWRB are green indicators indicating status of the first and second power inputs. When PWRA/PWRB is on and green, power has been accessed. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 6-65 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU and their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 9.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables. Table 6-65 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU Interface on the Front Panel NEG1(-) RTN1(+) NEG2(-) RTN2(+) Usage -48 V power input interface BGND power input interface -48 V power input interface BGND power input interface Label Operation warning label: indicates the following precautions, which should be taken for removal or insertion of the PIU board. 107

119 6 NE05E-S2 Boards NOTICE Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment, make sure that these power supplies are disabled. Do not remove or insert the board with power on Functions and Features The PIU, a power interface board, supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, surge protection detection, and information reporting. Table 6-66 lists functions and features of the PIU. Table 6-66 Functions and features of the PIU Function and Feature Power access Power protection Surge protection Power backup Description PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the equipment. The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and short circuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shocking board and components on it. The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection fails. The two DC power supplies back up each other Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 6-67 lists the technical specifications of the PIU. Table 6-67 Technical specifications of the PIU Item Board dimensions (mm) Technical Specification 41.4 (H) x (D) x 21.0 (W) Weight (kg) 0.12 Power consumption (W, room temperature) 0.5 Input voltage (V) to

120 6 NE05E-S2 Boards 6.15 NEC1FAN - Fan Board The NEC1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is NEC1. The FAN is housed in slot Front Panel On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 6-20 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN. Figure 6-20 Appearance of the front panel Indicators ESD Strap Jack Handle Label The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN: NEC1FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. The ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body. The handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during board replacement. The following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN: ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating. 109

121 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Functions and Features The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans. The functions and features of the FAN are as follows: Accesses one 12 V power supply for driving three fans. Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against overcurrent. Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system. Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version number, and board in-position information. Provides alarm indicators Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 6-68 lists the technical specifications of the FAN. Table 6-68 Technical specifications of the FAN Item Board dimensions (mm) Technical Specification 42.0 (H) x (D) x 28.5 (W) Weight (kg) 0.20 Power consumption (W) Low rate: 2.3 Medium rate: 6.1 High rate: 17 Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power 6.16 Filler Panel A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis Appearance and Valid Slots Appearance There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel. Figure 6-21 shows the appearance of a filler panel. Figure 6-21 Appearance of a filler panel 110

122 6 NE05E-S2 Boards Valid Slots A filler panel can be housed in any of slots 3-4 of a chassis Functions and Features A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances, and ensure proper ventilation. Main functions of a filler panel are as follows: Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement of electromagnetic radiation. Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis. Prevents internal voltage from being exposed. Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis. 111

123 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7 NE08E-S6 Boards About This Chapter Boards on NE08E-S6 are used together to provide various functions. 7.1 NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit The NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE (CXPB/CXPE for short) is a control, cross-connect, and protocol processing board. The function version of the CXPB/CXPE is NED2. The CXPB/CXPE is housed in slot 7 or slot NED2EM4T - 4 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board The NED2EM4T (EM4T for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board. The function version of the EM4T is NED2. The NED2EM4T is housed in any of slots 1 to NED2EM8T - 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board The NED2EM8T (EM8T for short) is an eight channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board. The function version of the EM8T is NED2. The NED2EM8T is housed in any of slots 1 to NED2EM4F - 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board The NED2EM4F (EM4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE optical interface board. The function version of the EM4F is NED2. The NED2EM4F is housed in any of slots 1 to NED2EM8F - 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board The NED2EM8F (EM8F for short) is an eight channels FE/GE optical interface board. The function version of the EM8F is NED2. The NED2EM8F is housed in any of slots 1 to NED2EM8M-4 Channels GE/FE Optical +4 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board The NED2EM8M (EM8M for short) board is a 4 Channels GE/FE Optical +4 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board and its functional version is NED2. The NED2EM8M is housed in any of slots 1 to NED2EX1S - 1 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board The NED2EX1S (EX1S for short) is a one channel 10 GE optical interface board. The function version of the EX1S is NED2. The NED2EX1S is housed in any of slots 1 to NED2EX2S - 2 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board 112

124 7 NE08E-S6 Boards The NED2EX2S (EX2S for short) is a two channels 10 GE optical interface board. The function version of the EX2S is NED2. The NED2EX2S is housed in any of slots 1 to 2 (when working with the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE). 7.9 NED2CQ1B - 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS Optical Interface Board This section describes the NED2CQ1B, a 4 channels channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS optical interface board, in terms of the overview, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications NED2PQ1: 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical Interface Board The NED2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board is a 4 x OC-3/STM-1 POS optical interface board and its functional version is NED2. It is configured in any of slots 1 to 6 in a chassis NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board The NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B (ML1A/ML1B for short) is a 16 channels E1 interface board. The function version of the ML1A/ML1B is NED3. The NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B is housed in slots 1 to NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board An NED1SA8 (SA8 for short) is an 8 channels synchronous/asynchronous serial interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1SA8 can be installed in an -S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E-S6's any slot from 1 to NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board An NED1MPAA (MPAA for short) is a 10 channels multi-protocol interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1MPAA can be installed in an NE05E-S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E- S6's any slot from 1 to TND1PIU - Power Interface Board The TND1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is TND1. The PIU is housed in slot 9 or slot AND1FAN - Fan Board The NED1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is NED1. The FAN is housed in slot Filler Panel A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis. 113

125 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7.1 NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE - System Control, Crossconnect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit The NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE (CXPB/CXPE for short) is a control, cross-connect, and protocol processing board. The function version of the CXPB/CXPE is NED2. The CXPB/CXPE is housed in slot 7 or slot 8. Table 7-1 provides comparison between NED2CXPB, and NED2CXPE. Table 7-1 Board Comparison Board Type Cross-Connect Capacity 1588 ACR NED2CXPB NED2CXPE 88 Gbit/s (44 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 44 Gbit/ s for the downstream traffic) 112 Gbit/s (56 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 56 Gbit/ s for the downstream traffic) Not supported Supported Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE, there are indicators, buttons, switch for the ejector lever, and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 show the appearance of the front panel of the NED2CXPB/ NED2CXPE. Figure 7-1 Front panel of the NED2CXPB Figure 7-2 Front panel of the NED2CXPE 114

126 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Button Switch for the Ejector Lever Interface The following buttons are present on the front panel of the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE: CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use. RST button, which is used for reset on the board. When you press the RST button and then release it, the board is reset. LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, except the service port indicators on the NED2EM4T, NED2EM4F, NED2EM8T, NED2EM8F, NED2EM8M, NED2EX1S, NED2EX2S, all the board indicators on the NE are on. On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To remove a board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers. Table 7-2 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE. Table 7-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Pin Correspondi ng Cable ETH/ OAM RJ45 10M/100M auto-sensing Ethernet NM interface or Console interface Refer to Table 7-3. Refer to 9.2 Management Cables. CLK RJ45 Clock input/output interface Refer to Table 7-4. TOD RJ45 Time input/output interface Refer to Table 7-5. ALMI/O RJ45 Alarm input/output interface Refer to Table 7-6. Refer to 9.4 Clock Cables. Refer to 9.4 Clock Cables

127 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-3 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Transmit positive of the NM interface 2 Transmit negative of the NM interface Receive positive of the NM interface 4 Grounding end of the Console interface 5 Receive end of the Console interface 6 Receive negative of the NM interface 7 Unspecified 8 Transmit end of the Console interface Table 7-4 Pins of the CLK interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Negative receive end of external clock 2 Positive receive end of external clock Unspecified 4 Negative transmit end of external clock 5 Positive transmit end of external clock 6 Unspecified 7 Unspecified 8 Unspecified 116

128 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-5 Pins of the TOD interface Front View Pin Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information) 1 Unspecified Unspecified 2 Unspecified Unspecified Negative input for the 1pps signal (RS422 level) Negative output for the 1pps signal (RS422 level) 4 Grounding end Grounding end 5 Grounding end Grounding end 6 Positive input for the 1pps signal (RS422 level) 7 Negative input for time information (RS422 level) 8 Positive input for time information (RS422 level) Positive output for the 1pps signal (RS422 level) Negative output for time information (RS422 level) Positive output for time information (RS422 level) NOTE The TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding two working modes. Table 7-6 Pins of the ALMI/O interface Front View Pin Usage 1 Input for the digital parameter 2 Grounding end Input for the digital parameter 4 Input for the digital parameter 5 Grounding end 6 Grounding end 7 Positive output for the digital parameter 117

129 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Front View Pin Usage 8 Negative output for the digital parameter Functions and Features The NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces. Table 7-7 lists the functions and features of the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE. Table 7-7 Functions and Features of the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE Function and Feature Basic function Description Crossconnect capacity NED2CXPB: 88 Gbit/s (44 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 44 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) NED2CXPE: 112 Gbit/s (56 Gbit/s for the upstream traffic and 56 Gbit/s for the downstream traffic) Supports switching, control, and clock management. Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function. Auxiliary interface function Provides one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s auto-sensing Ethernet NM interface or Console interface for communication with the NMS. Provides one time input/output interface and provides the synchronization time source for the equipment. Provides one clock input/output interface and provides the synchronization clock source for the equipment. Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface provides three inputs of alarm digital parameters. Tact switches Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector levers to remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered to start the active/standby protection switching. NOTE When you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switching is triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers DIP Switch A board has a set of DIP switches. 118

130 ON DIP NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Figure 7-3 shows the locations of the DIP switches on NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE. Figure 7-3 Locations of the DIP switches on NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE. 拨码开关 You can use the DIP switches to delete the configuration file loaded on the device. Set DIP switches on NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE to 1, 1, 0, and 1. During startup, the device deletes the loaded configuration file based on the DIF switch status. NOTICE This operation should be executed with caution. Use it under the guidance of technical personnel. After the configuration file is deleted, reset the DIF switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0. In this way, you do not need to delete the configuration file at each startup. The numeral indicates 1, and the letter indicates 0. The device password is deleted when the configuration file is deleted Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE include board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg):

131 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Power consumption (W, room temperature): 28.4 (NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE) 7.2 NED2EM4T - 4 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board The NED2EM4T (EM4T for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board. The function version of the EM4T is NED2. The NED2EM4T is housed in any of slots 1 to Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EM4T, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EM4T. Figure 7-4 Front panel of the NED2EM4T Indicator Interface The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EM4T: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port NOTE.Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service port transmit/receive status indicator (ACT). For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Table 7-8 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EM4T. 120

132 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-8 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EM4T Interfac e on the Front Panel Interfac e Type Usage Pin Corresponding Cable FE/GE0 to FE/ GE3 RJ45 FE/GE auto-sensing electrical interface Refer to Table 7-9. Refer to Ethernet Cables. Table 7-9 Pins of the FE/GE electrical interfaces Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair 1 2 Negative of twisted pair Positive of twisted pair 2 4 Positive of twisted pair 3 5 Negative of twisted pair 3 6 Negative of twisted pair 2 7 Positive of twisted pair 4 8 Negative of twisted pair Functions and Features The NED2EM4T mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with the control board. Table 7-10 lists the functions and features of the NED2EM4T. Table 7-10 Functions and features of the NED2EM4T Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides four FE/GE electrical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports signals at 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. 121

133 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature Description Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Technical specifications of the NED2EM4T board include interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 7-11 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the NED2EM4T board. Table 7-11 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE and enterprise regulations. Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg): 0.36 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 6.8 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 7.3 NED2EM8T - 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board The NED2EM8T (EM8T for short) is an eight channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board. The function version of the EM8T is NED2. The NED2EM8T is housed in any of slots 1 to

134 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EM8T, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-5 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EM8T. Figure 7-5 Front panel of the NED2EM8T Indicator Interface The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EM8T: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port NOTE Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service port transmit/receive status indicator (ACT). For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Table 7-12 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EM8T. Table 7-12 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EM8T Interfac e on the Front Panel Interfac e Type Usage Pin Corresponding Cable FE/GE0 to FE/ GE7 RJ45 FE/GE auto-sensing electrical interface Refer to Table Refer to Ethernet Cables. 123

135 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-13 Pins of the FE/GE electrical interfaces Front View Pin Usage 1 Positive of twisted pair 1 2 Negative of twisted pair Positive of twisted pair 2 4 Positive of twisted pair 3 5 Negative of twisted pair 3 6 Negative of twisted pair 2 7 Positive of twisted pair 4 8 Negative of twisted pair Functions and Features The NED2EM8T mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with the control board. Table 7-14 lists the functions and features of the NED2EM8T. Table 7-14 Functions and features of the NED2EM8T Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides eight FE/GE electrical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports signals at 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock or IEEE 1588v2. 124

136 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Technical Specifications Technical specifications of the NED2EM8T board include interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications Table 7-15 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the NED2EM8T board. Table 7-15 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s. Complies with IEEE and enterprise regulations. Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg): 0.39 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 11.7 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 7.4 NED2EM4F - 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board The NED2EM4F (EM4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE optical interface board. The function version of the EM4F is NED2. The NED2EM4F is housed in any of slots 1 to Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EM4F, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-6shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EM4F. Figure 7-6 Front panel of the NED2EM4F 125

137 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EM4F: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status L/A0 to L/A3 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/ receive status For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interface Four SFP interfaces are present on the EM4F. Table 7-16 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the EM4F. Table 7-16 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EM4F Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Correspo nding Fiber Optical module IN0 to IN3 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. Refer to 9.6 Optical Fibers. OUT0 to OUT3 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE/FE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE/FE optical signal. Electrical module OUT0 IN0, OUT3 IN3 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For details, see Ethernet Cables. NOTE The GE SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module; when the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module. 126

138 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Functions and Features The NED2EM4F mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the control board. Table 7-17 lists the functions and features of the NED2EM4F. Table 7-17 Functions and features of the NED2EM4F Basic function Basic function Description Supports four FE/GE interfaces (SFP). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical modules and GE electrical modules. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Technical specifications of the NED2EM4F board include interface specifications and physical specifications. For information about the swappable optical/electrical FE/GE optical modules supported at SFP interfaces on the NED2EM4F board, see Table 7-18, Table 7-19, Table 7-20, and Table The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical/electrical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 7-18 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber bidirectional 127

139 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Table 7-19 Information about GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial S esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber esfp, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km bidirectional CWDM esfp, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial esfp, 1521nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1551nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1571nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1591nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1611nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km 128

140 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx 1570 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1570 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Table 7-20 Information about FE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m Table 7-21 Information about GE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, Auto Negotiate, 100 m Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg): 0.39 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 7.7 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 7.5 NED2EM8F - 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board The NED2EM8F (EM8F for short) is an eight channels FE/GE optical interface board. The function version of the EM8F is NED2. The NED2EM8F is housed in any of slots 1 to Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EM8F, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EM8F. 129

141 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Figure 7-7 Front panel of the NED2EM8F Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EM8F: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status L/A0 to L/A7 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/ receive status For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interface Eight SFP interfaces are present on the EM8F. Table 7-22 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the EM8F. Table 7-22 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EM8F Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Correspo nding Cable Fiber Optical interface IN0 to IN7 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. Refer to 9.6 Optical Fibers. OUT0 to OUT7 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE/FE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE/FE optical signal. 130

142 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Correspo nding Cable Fiber Electrical module OUT0 IN0, OUT7 IN7 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For details, see Ethernet Cables. NOTE The GE SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module; when the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module Functions and Features The NED2EM8F mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the control board. Table 7-23 lists the functions and features of the NED2EM8F. Table 7-23 Functions and features of the NED2EM8F Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports eight FE/GE interfaces (SFP). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical modules and GE electrical modules. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. NOTE If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2. 131

143 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Technical Specifications Technical specifications of the NED2EM8F board include interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications For information about the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported at SFP interfaces on the NED2EM8F board, see Table 7-24, Table 7-25, Table 7-26, and Table The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical/electrical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 7-24 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Table 7-25 Information about GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial S esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber esfp, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km bidirectional CWDM esfp, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial esfp, 1521nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1551nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km 132

144 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 1571nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1591nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1611nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx 1570 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1570 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Table 7-26 Information about FE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m Table 7-27 Information about GE Electrical Module Code Electrical Module Information BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, Auto Negotiate, 100 m Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg): 0.39 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 16.6 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 133

145 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7.6 NED2EM8M-4 Channels GE/FE Optical +4 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board The NED2EM8M (EM8M for short) board is a 4 Channels GE/FE Optical +4 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board and its functional version is NED2. The NED2EM8M is housed in any of slots 1 to Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EM8M board, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance Figure 7-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EM8M board. Figure 7-8 Front panel of the NED2EM8M board Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EM8M board: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status Status indicators (L/A0 to L/A3), green, which indicate the port connection status and data receiving and transmission status LINK indicator, green, which indicates the port connection status ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data receiving and transmission status of the port NOTE There are four LINK indicators and four ACT indicators on the NED2EM8M board. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicator are present above each FE/GE electrical interface (RJ-45). For the descriptions of the indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces Table 7-28 describes the types and functions of the interfaces on the NED2EM8M board. 134

146 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-28 Interfaces on the NED2EM8M board Interfaces Interface Type Function Required Cable OUT0 IN0 to OUT3 IN3 SFP FE/GE signal input/output interfaces For details, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. FE/GE0 to FE/ GE3 RJ-45 FE/GE electrical signal input/ output interfaces For details, see Ethernet Cables. Table 7-29 SFP interfaces Interfaces Supported Pluggable Modules Interface Type Function OUT0 IN0 to OUT3 IN3 Optical modules LC FE/GE optical signal input/output interfaces Electrical modules RJ-45 Table 7-30 Pins of FE/GE electrical interfaces Front View Pin Function 1 Positive of twisted pair 1 2 Negative of twisted pair Positive of twisted pair 2 4 Positive of twisted pair 3 5 Negative of twisted pair 3 6 Negative of twisted pair 2 7 Positive of twisted pair 4 8 Negative of twisted pair Functions and Features The NED2EM8M (EM8M for short) board provides four FE/GE SFP interfaces and four FE/ GE electrical interfaces, and it works with the system control board to transceive and process 4 x FE/GE services. Table 7-31 describes the functions and features of the EM4C board. 135

147 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-31 Functions and features of the EM4C board Functions and Features Basic functions Description Provides four FE/GE SFP interfaces and four FE/GE electrical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Supports temperature and voltage detection. Interfaces FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules and GE optical modules. FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports flow control. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clocks Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). NOTE Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR. If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2. When using a 10 Mbit/s electrical interface, the board does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance Technical specifications of the NED2EM8M board include interface specifications and physical specifications. Interface Specifications For the specifications of FE/GE electrical interfaces, see Table For information about the swappable FE/GE optical modules supported at FE/GE (SFP) interfaces, see Table 7-33 and Table The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical/electrical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 7-32 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface Item Interface rate Specification Requirement 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s. 136

148 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Item RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement Complies with IEEE and enterprise regulations. Table 7-33 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Table 7-34 Information about GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial S esfp, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber esfp, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km bidirectional CWDM esfp, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial esfp, 1521nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1551nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1571nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1591nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, 1611nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km 137

149 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx 1570 nm/rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1490 nm/rx 1570 nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Physical Specifications Dimensions (mm): (H) x (W) x (D) Weight (kg): 0.40 Power consumption under room temperature (W): 12.6 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 7.7 NED2EX1S - 1 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board The NED2EX1S (EX1S for short) is a one channel 10 GE optical interface board. The function version of the EX1S is NED2. The NED2EX1S is housed in any of slots 1 to Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EX1S, there are indicators and an interface. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-9 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EX1S. Figure 7-9 Front panel of the NED2EX1S 138

150 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EX1S: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status L/A indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/receive status For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interface One SFP+ interface is present on the NED2EX1S. Table 7-35 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EX1S. Table 7-35 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EX1S Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Correspo nding Fiber Optical interface IN LC Input interface for the 10GE optical signal OUT LC Output interface for the 10GE optical signal Refer to 9.6 Optical Fibers Functions and Features The NED2EX1S mainly accesses one channel of 10 GE signal, and processes the services with the control board. Table 7-36 lists the functions and features of the NED2EX1S. Table 7-36 Functions and features of the NED2EX1S Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports one 10GE interfaces (SFP+). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports 10GE SFP+ optical modules. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. 139

151 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature Clock Description Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Technical specifications of the NED2EX1S board include interface specifications and physical specifications. For information about the swappable optical modules supported at SFP+ interfaces on the NED2EX1S board, see Table The interface specifications depend on the optical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 7-37 Information about 10GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S SFP+, 850nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.3km Two-fiber S SFP+, 1310nm, LC, Singlemode, 10km bidirectional Commercial S SFP+, 1550nm, LC, Singlemode, 40km 02310PVU SFP+, 1550nm, LC, Singlemode, 80km SFP+, 850nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.1km Two-fiber SFP+, 1310nm, LC, Singlemode, 10km bidirectional Industrial SFP+, 1550nm, LC, Singlemode, 40km Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg): 0.35 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 6.2 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 140

152 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7.8 NED2EX2S - 2 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board The NED2EX2S (EX2S for short) is a two channels 10 GE optical interface board. The function version of the EX2S is NED2. The NED2EX2S is housed in any of slots 1 to 2 (when working with the NED2CXPB/NED2CXPE) Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2EX2S, there are indicators and an interface. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the NED2EX2S. Figure 7-10 Front panel of the NED2EX2S Indicator Interface The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2EX2S: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status L/A indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/receive status For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Two SFP+ interface is present on the NED2EX2S. Table 7-38 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EX2S. Table 7-38 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2EX2S Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage Correspo nding Fiber Optical interface IN LC Input interface for the 10GE optical signal OUT LC Output interface for the 10GE optical signal Refer to 9.6 Optical Fibers. 141

153 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Functions and Features The NED2EX2S mainly accesses two channels of 10 GE signal, and processes the services with the control board. Table 7-39 lists the functions and features of the NED2EX2S. Table 7-39 Functions and features of the NED2EX2S Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports two 10GE interfaces (SFP+). Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Supports 10GE SFP+ optical modules. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the traffic control function. Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes. Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous Ethernet). Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Technical specifications of the NED2EX2S board include interface specifications and physical specifications. For information about the swappable optical modules supported at SFP+ interfaces on the NED2EX2S board, see Table The interface specifications depend on the optical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 7-40 Information about 10GE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S SFP+, 850nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.3km Two-fiber S SFP+, 1310nm, LC, Singlemode, 10km bidirectional Commercial S SFP+, 1550nm, LC, Singlemode, 40km 02310PVU SFP+, 1550nm, LC, Singlemode, 80km 142

154 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Code Optical Module Information Remarks SFP+, 850nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.1km Two-fiber SFP+, 1310nm, LC, Singlemode, 10km bidirectional Industrial SFP+, 1550nm, LC, Singlemode, 40km Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W) Weight (kg): 0.60 Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.6 Ambient temperature: -40 ºC to +65 ºC 7.9 NED2CQ1B - 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS Optical Interface Board This section describes the NED2CQ1B, a 4 channels channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS optical interface board, in terms of the overview, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2CQ1B board, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the NED2CQ1B board. Figure 7-11 Front panel of the NED2CQ1B board Indicator The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED2CQ1B board: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LOS1 to LOS4 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status For details on meanings of the indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. 143

155 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Interfaces Four SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the NED2CQ1B board. Table 7-41 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For details on fiber connections to these interfaces, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. Table 7-41 Types and usage of the interfaces on the NED2CQ1B board Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage IN0 to IN3 LC Input interface for STM-1 (VC12) optical signals OUT0 to OUT3 LC Output interface for STM-1 (VC12) optical signals NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module. When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time Functions and Features When working with the main control board, the NED2CQ1B board receives and processes 4 channels STM-1(VC12) signals. Table 7-42 lists the functions and features of the NED2CQ1B. Table 7-42 Functions and features of the NED2CQ1B Function and Feature Basic function Remarks Provides four channelized STM-1 optical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. CPOS interface function The CPOS interface supports FE optical modules. The CPOS interface supports inloops and outloops. The E1 channel supports the PRBS test. The E1 channel supports inloops and outloops. The E1 channel supports the master/slave clock modes. 144

156 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature Remarks The E1 channel supports the serial interface in the E1 and CE1 modes. The serial interface supports the ATM, TDM, and PPP protocols. CPOS-Trunk interface Number of CPOS-Trunk member interfaces 2 The E1 channel supports the serial interface in the E1 and CE1 modes. The Trunk-serial interface supports the TDM and PPP protocols. Supports the APS protocol. ATM Number of supported ATM E1 services Number of supported IMA groups Maximum number of E1 links supported by each IMA group Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N 32) or 1-to-1 format. Supports the ATM bundle function. Number of supported PVCs/PVPs Number of supported local ATM CCCs Number of supported remote ATM PWE3s TDM Supports CES services in CESoPSN and SAToP modes. PPP Number of supported local TDM CCCs Number of supported remote TDM PWE3s Number of supported PPP links Number of supported ML- PPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group

157 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature Remarks Number of supported global MP groups Maximum number of links supported by each global MP group Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the NED1CQ1B board cover interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Interface Specifications For information about the swappable optical modules supported by SFP interfaces on the NED2CQ1B board, see Table The interface specifications depend on the optical modules on the board. For details on the optical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. Table 7-43 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Other Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (W) x (D) Weight (kg): 0.47 Power consumption (W):

158 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7.10 NED2PQ1: 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical Interface Board The NED2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board is a 4 x OC-3/STM-1 POS optical interface board and its functional version is NED2. It is configured in any of slots 1 to 6 in a chassis Front Panel On the front panel of the NED2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board, there are indicators and four optical interfaces. Appearance Figure 7-12 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ1 board. Figure 7-12 Front panel of the PQ1 board Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the PQ1 board: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status LOS0, LOS1, LOS2, and LOS3, red or green, which indicate the port status For the descriptions of the indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces There are four SFP interfaces on the PQ1 board. Table 7-44 describes the types and functions of the interfaces. For details on the required optical fibers, see 9.6 Optical Fibers. Table 7-44 Interfaces on the PQ1 board Interfaces Interface Type Function IN0 to IN3 LC STM-1 optical signal input interfaces OUT0 to OUT3 LC STM-1 optical signal output interfaces 147

159 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Interfaces Interface Type Function NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module. When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time Functions and Features The NED2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board works with the system control board to transceive and process 4 x STM-1 (POS) data services. Table 7-45 describes the functions and features of the PQ1 board. Table 7-45 Functions and features of the PQ1 board Functions and Features Basic functions Description Provides four POS optical interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Supports temperature and voltage detection. Interfaces Supports FE optical modules. Supports the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). Supports the master clock mode (unconfigurable). Supports inloops and outloops Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance Technical specifications of the NED2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board include interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Interface Specifications For information about the swappable optical modules supported at SFP interfaces on the NED2PQ1 board, see Table The interface specifications depend on the optical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical modules, see 8 Swappable Optical Modules. 148

160 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-46 Information about FE optical modules Code Optical Module Information Remarks S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber S esfp, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km esfp, Tx 1310 nm/rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber esfp, Tx 1550 nm/rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km bidirectional Commercial esfp, Tx1310nm/Rx1550nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km esfp, Tx1550nm/Rx1310nm, 0.1bit/s-1.25Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40km Other Specifications Dimensions (mm): (H) x (W) x (D) Weight (kg): 0.47 Power consumption (W): NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board The NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B (ML1A/ML1B for short) is a 16 channels E1 interface board. The function version of the ML1A/ML1B is NED3. The NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B is housed in slots 1 to 6. NOTE Front Panel The mapping impedance of an interface on the NED3ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interface on the NED3ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of the NED3ML1A and NED3ML1B are the same. On the front panel of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces. Appearances of the Front Panel Figure 7-13 and Figure 7-14 show the appearances of the front panel of the NED3ML1A/ NED3ML1B. Figure 7-13 Front panels of the NED3ML1A 149

161 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Figure 7-14 Front panels of the NED3ML1B Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status For details on meanings of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B. Table 7-47 lists the type and usage of the interfaces Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and Ohm 16 x E1 Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces. Table 7-47 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Usage NED3ML1A NED3ML1B 0-15 Anea ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the zero to fifteenth channels of E1 services. 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the zero to fifteenth channels of E1 services. Table 7-48 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface. Table 7-48 Pins of the Anea 96 interface Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage 1 R x 0 25 T x R x 1 27 T x R x 2 29 T x 2 150

162 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage R x 3 31 T x R x 4 33 T x R x 5 35 T x R x 6 37 T x R x 7 39 T x R x 8 41 T x R x 9 43 T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x R x T x

163 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Functions and Features NED3ML1A is a 75-ohm E1 board and the NED3ML1B is a 120-ohm E1 board. The NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B must be used with the system control board to access and process 16 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP are supported. Table 7-49 lists the functions and features of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B. Table 7-49 Functions and features of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B Function and Feature Basic function Remarks Provides 16 E1 interfaces. Supports the hot swappable function. Detects the temperature and voltage of the board. Interface function Impedance supported by the interface NED3ML1A: 75 ohm NED3ML1B: 120 ohm Supports the E1 and CE1 modes. Supports the master/slave clock mode. Supports the HDB3 line coding (unconfigurable). Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 interface in the receive/transmit direction. ATM Number of supported ATM E1 services Number of supported IMA groups Maximum number of E1 links in each IMA group Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N- to-1 (N 32) or 1-to-1 format. Supports the ATM bundle function. Number of supported PVCs/ PVPs Number of supported local ATM CCCs Number of supported remote ATM PWE3s

164 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature TDM Remarks Supports CES services in CESoPSN and SAToP modes. Supports the timeslot compression function. For services in CESoPSN mode, a minimum of 1 timeslots can be bundled during serial port configuration. Supports the fractional E1. Different timeslots of an E1 can be bound to different CES PWs. PPP Number of supported local TDM CCCs Number of supported remote TDM PWE3s Number of supported PPP links Number of supported ML- PPP groups Maximum number of links supported by each ML-PPP group Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization Technical Specifications Interface Specifications The technical specifications of the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B include the interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 7-50 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B. Table 7-50 Specifications of the interfaces on the NED3ML1A/NED3ML1B Item Specification Requirement Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048 Interface impedance Interface code 75 ohm (ML1A) 120 ohm (ML1B) HDB3 Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G

165 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Item Attenuation tolerance of the input interface at the point with a frequency of 1024 khz (db) Anti-interference capability of the input interface Specification Requirement 0 to 6 Complies with ITU-T G.703 Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823 Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 Physical Specifications Board dimensions (mm): (H) x (D) x (W)(0.80 in in in.) Weight (kg): 0.44(0.97 lb) Power consumption (W, room temperature): NED1SA8-8 Channels Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Board An NED1SA8 (SA8 for short) is an 8 channels synchronous/asynchronous serial interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1SA8 can be installed in an -S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E-S6's any slot from 1 to Front Panel Panel Appearance An NED1SA8 has indicators and interfaces on its panel. Figure 7-15 shows the appearance of an NED1SA8's panel. Figure 7-15 NED1SA8 panel appearance Indicator An NED1SA8 provides the following indicators: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status 154

166 7 NE08E-S6 Boards SA indicator, green or orange, which indicates interface service status For indicator description, see 11.1 Indicators. Interface An NED1SA8 provides eight DB28 interfaces. Table 7-51 describes the interface types and functions. Table 7-51 NED1SA8 interfaces Panel Interface Interface Type Function Fiber/Cable X.21/V.24/ V.35 DB28 Used for X.21/V.24/V.35 signal input X.21 DTE Cable X.21 DCE Cable V.24 DTE Cable V.24 DCE Cable V.35 DTE Cable V.35 DCE Cable Table 7-52 describes the pins on a DB28 interface. Table 7-52 DB28 interface pins Front View Pin Function Description Pos.1 1 TXD+ Transmit data 2 TXD- 3 TXC+ Transmit clock 4 TXC- 5 Unspecified - Pos.28 6 GND Signal ground 7 MODE0 X.21/V.24/V.35 mode control 8 MODE1 9 MODE2 10 MODE_DCE/DTE DCE/DTE mode control 11 DCD+ Digital carrier detector 12 DCD- 13 RTS+ Request to send 155

167 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Front View Pin Function Description 14 RTS- 15 TXCE+ Transmit clock of an external device 16 TXCE- 17 RXC+ Receive clock 18 RXC- 19 RXD+ Received data 20 RXD- 21 GND Shield 22 LL Local loopback 23 CTS+ Clear to send 24 CTS- 25 DSR+ Data set ready 26 DSR- 27 DTR+ Data terminal ready 28 DTR Functions and Features An NED1SA8 receives 8 channels of synchronous or asynchronous services and processes these services with the control board. NE lists the functions and features of an NED1SA8. Table 7-53 NED1SA8 functions and features Function and Feature Basic function and feature Description Provides eight synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Allows the serial interfaces to set to X.21, V.24, or V.35 interfaces. Supports the DTE and DCE working modes. Supports hot swap. Supports temperature and voltage detection. X.21 interface Supports synchronous and asynchronous modes. 156

168 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature Description Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50 in asynchronous mode. V.24 interface Supports synchronous and asynchronous modes. Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50 in asynchronous mode. V.35 interface Supports the synchronous mode Working Principle and Signal Flow An NED1SA8 consists of interfaces, a multiprotocol transceiver, an FPGA module, clock module, and power module. Figure 7-16 shows the function block diagram of an NED1SA8. Figure 7-16 NED1SA8 function block diagram AND1SA8 Backplane DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 DB28 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21/V.24/V.35 Multiprotocol Transceiver Data Clock Control FPGA module GE Active/ standby signal selection CLK Control CXP CXP CXP Clock module Power module -48V/-60V PIU -48V/-60V PIU In the Receive Direction In the Transmit Direction An NED1SA8 receives X.21/V.24/V3.5 signals (including data, clock, and control signals) through the DB28 interfaces on its panel. The multiprotocol transceiver matches these signals and converts them into transistor-transistor logic (TTL) signals. After the signals arrive at the FPGA module, the FPGA module completes PCM processing and performs multi-channel multiplexing to send the data to the control board over E1 PWE3. An NED1SA8 accepts the service data from the control board, extracts the E1 signals from the FPGA module for demultiplexing, identifies the target interfaces, converts the data to TTL 157

169 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Multiprotocol Transceiver FPGA Module Clock Module Power Module signals, and sends the signals to the multiprotocol transceiver. After the signals arrive, the multiprotocol transceiver converts the TTL signals to signals that comply with interface protocol requirements and sends the signals out through the DB28 interfaces on the panel. The multiprotocol transceiver supports the following functions: Interface signal match Conversion from various signals to TTL signals Interface loopback The FPGA module completes the following functions: PCM processing on signals E1 frame multiplexing and demultiplexing PWE Specifications Interface Specifications The clock module provides a working clock for modules on the NED1SA8. The power module supplies DC power to modules on the NED1SA8. The technical specifications of an NED1SA8 include interface specifications and physical specifications. Table 7-54 lists the NED1SA8's interface specifications. Table 7-54 NED1SA8's interface specifications Item Synchronous X.21 interface Asynchronous X.21 interface Synchronous V.24 interface Asynchronous V.24 interface Rate (bit/s) N x 64 kbit/s (N 31) 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or kbit/s or 128 kbit/s 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or

170 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Item Synchronous V.35 interface Rate (bit/s) N x 64 kbit/s (N 31) Physical Specifications Dimensions (H x W x D): mm x mm x mm (0.80 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.89 in.) Weight: 0.48 kg Power consumption (normal room temperature): 18 W Operating ambient temperature: -5ºC to +55ºC (23ºF to 131ºF) 7.13 NED1MPAA - 10 Channels Multi-protocol Interface Board An NED1MPAA (MPAA for short) is a 10 channels multi-protocol interface board. Its function version is NED1. An NED1MPAA can be installed in an NE05E-S2's slot 3 or 4 or an NE08E- S6's any slot from 1 to Front Panel An NED1MPAA has indicators and interfaces on its panel. Panel Appearance Figure 7-17 shows the appearance of an NED1MPAA's panel. Figure 7-17 NED1MPAA panel appearance Indicator An NED1MPAA provides the following indicators: STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status For indicator description, see 11.1 Indicators. 159

171 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Interface An NED1MPAA provides two RS-232 interfaces, two RS-485/RS-422 interface, two E&M interfaces, and four FXS/FXO interfaces. Table 7-55 describes the interface types and functions. Table 7-55 NED1MPAA interfaces Panel Interface Interface Type Function Fiber/Cable RS232 0 and RS232 2 RS485 1 and RS485 3 RJ-45 (RS232 0 and RS485 1 share an RJ-45 interface, and RS232 2 and RS485 3 share another RJ-45 interface) Used for RS-232 signal input Used for RS-485/RS-422 signal input RS-232 Serial Interface Cable Must be made on site based on the interface type of the remote device EM4 and EM5 RJ-45 Used for E&M service relay Must be made on site based on the interface type of the remote device FXSO6- FXSO9 RJ-11 Used as an FXS interface for simulating a subscriber's line interface and for normal analog phone and fax machine access Used as an FXO interface (functioning as a loop trunk interface) for PSTN access Standard Telephone Line. Table 7-56 describes RS232 RS485 interface pins. Table 7-56 RS232 RS485 interface pins Front View Pin Function (RS232) Function (RS485 Half-Duplex) Function (RS422/ RS485 Full- Duplex) Unspecified Receive and transmit positive pole of the RS-485 interface 2 Unspecified Receive and transmit negative pole of the RS-485 interface Transmit positive pole of the RS-485 interface Transmit negative pole of the RS-485 interface 160

172 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Front View Pin Function (RS232) 3 RS-232 interface's transmit end Function (RS485 Half-Duplex) Unspecified Function (RS422/ RS485 Full- Duplex) Unspecified 4 Unspecified RS-485 interface's ground terminal RS-485 interface's ground terminal 5 RS-232 interface's ground terminal 6 RS-232 interface's receive end Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified 7 Unspecified Unspecified Receive positive pole of the RS-485 interface 8 Unspecified Unspecified Receive negative pole of the RS-485 interface Table 7-57 describes the pins on an E&M interface. Table 7-57 EM interface pins Front View Pin Definition Function 1 SB Used for outputting isolated signal power E Used for a PBX to receive control signaling 3 R1 2-wire mode: not connected 4-wire mode: RING sending 4 R 2-wire mode: RING 4-wire mode: RING receiving 5 T 2-wire mode: TIP 4-wire mode: TIP receiving 6 T1 2-wire mode: not connected 4-wire mode: TIP sending 7 M Used for a PBX to transmit control signaling 8 SG Isolated signal ground 161

173 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Table 7-58 describes FXSO interface pins. Table 7-58 FXSO interface pins Front View Pin Function 1 Unspecified 2 Unspecified 3 TIP RING 5 Unspecified 6 Unspecified Functions and Features An NED1MPAA receives RS-232, RS-482, E&M, FXS, and FXO services and processes these services with the control board. NE lists the functions and features of an NED1MPAA. Table 7-59 NED1MPAA functions and features Function and Feature Basic function and feature Description Provides two RS-232 interfaces, two RS-485 interfaces, two E&M interfaces, and four FXS/FXO interfaces. Supports hot swap. Supports temperature and voltage detection. RS-232 interface Supports only the asynchronous mode. Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50. RS-485 interface Supports RS485 (half-duplex) or RS422/RS485 (full-duplex). Supports only the asynchronous mode. Supports the sub-rate multiplexing protocol X.50 in asynchronous mode. E&M Supports 2-wire and 4-wire working modes. Supports E&M relay. FXSO Can function as an FXS or FXO interface. 162

174 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Function and Feature Description An FXS interface supports analog phone and fax machine access. An FXO support public switched telephone network (PSTN) access. Supports Z interface extension Supports the hotline phone function Working Principle and Signal Flow An NED1MPAA consists of interfaces, an RS-232 module, RS-485 module, FXS/FXO module, E&M module, FPGA module, clock module, and power module. Figure 7-18 shows the function block diagram of an NED1MPAA. Figure 7-18 NED1MPAA function block diagram AND1MPAA Backplane RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-11 RJ-11 RJ-11 RJ-11 RS-232 RS-232 RS-485 RS-485 E&M E&M FXS/FXO FXS/FXO FXS/FXO FXS/FXO RS-232 module RS-485 module E&M module FXS/ FXO module FPGA 模块 GE Active/ standby signal selection CLK Control CXP CXP CXP Clock module Power module -48V/-60V PIU -48V/-60V PIU In the Receive Direction An NED1MPAA provides multi-protocol access services through interfaces on its panel. The RS-232 module converts the signals on RS-232 serial interfaces to TTL signals. The RS-485 module converts the signals on RS-485 serial interfaces to TTL signals. The E&M module completes E&M signaling and voice signaling detection and converts the signals to PCM signals. The FXS/FXO module completes voice signal processing and converts the signals to PCM signals. After the signals arrive at the FPGA module, the FPGA module completes PCM processing on TTL signals sent from the RS-232 and RS-485 modules, performs multi-channel 163

175 7 NE08E-S6 Boards multiplexing, and uses the E1 PWE3 mode to send the data to the control board over the backplane GE channel. In the Transmit Direction An NED1MPAA accepts the service data from the control board, extracts the E1 signals from the FPGA module for demultiplexing, identifies the target interfaces, and sends the signals to the RS-232, RS-485, FXS/FXO, and E&M modules after processing. These modules then process and convert the signals to those that comply with interface protocol requirements and finally send the signals out through the interfaces on the panel. RS-232 Module RS-485 Module E&M Module FXS/FXO Module The RS-232 module completes the following functions: Interface signal match Conversion from differential signals to TTL signals The RS-485 module completes the following functions: Interface signal match Conversion from differential signals to TTL signals The E&M module completes the following functions: E&M signal receive, detection, report, and transmission Conversion from voice signals to PCM signals The FXS/FXO module completes the following functions: Conversion from voice signals to PCM signals FPGA Module Clock Module The FPGA module completes the following functions: PCM processing on signals E1 frame multiplexing and demultiplexing PWE3 The clock module provides a working clock for modules on the NED1MPAA. 164

176 J21 NE05E&NE08E Mid-End Router 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Power Module Jumper The power module supplies DC power to modules on the NED1MPAA. Jumpers are used to set the working modes of RS485 interfaces on an NED1MPAA. Jumper Position Figure 7-19 shows the jumper positions on an NED1MPAA. Figure 7-19 Jumper positions on an NED1MPAA Jumper J20 An NED1MPAA has two RS485 interfaces on its panel. The J20 jumper is used by the RS485 1 interface and the J21 jumper is used by the RS485 3 interface. Jumper Specifications RS485 1 and RS485 3 interfaces support the RS-485 half-duplex mode or RS-422/RS-485 fullduplex mode. In former mode, when an RS485 1 or RS485 3 interface resides at the beginning or end of a connection on a topology, the jumper must be in the short-circuit state (the jumper cap retained). In other situations, the jumper must be in the open-circuit state (the jumper cap removed). The technical specifications of an NED1MPAA include interface specifications and physical specifications. 165

177 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Interface Specifications Table 7-60 lists the interface specifications of the NED1MPAA. Table 7-60 Interface specifications of the NED1MPAA. Item Rate (bit/s) RS , 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or RS , 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 48000, or N x 64 kbit/s (N 8) RS , 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 48000, or N x 64 kbit/s (N 8) E&M FXS/FXO 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Physical Specifications Dimensions (H x W x D): mm x mm x mm (0.80 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.89 in.) Weight: 0.49 kg Power consumption (normal room temperature): 12 W Operating ambient temperature: -5ºC to +55ºC (23ºF to 131ºF) 7.14 TND1PIU - Power Interface Board Front Panel The TND1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is TND1. The PIU is housed in slot 9 or slot 10. On the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, power supply interfaces, and a label. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-20 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. 166

178 7 NE08E-S6 Boards Figure 7-20 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU Indicators The following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU. PWR, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWR is on and green, it indicates that power is accessed. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. Interfaces The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 7-61 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU and their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 9.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables. Table 7-61 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU Interface on the Front Panel NEG(-) RTN(+) Usage -48 V power input interface BGND power input interface Label Operation warning label: indicates the following precautions, which should be taken for removal or insertion of the PIU board. 167

179 7 NE08E-S6 Boards NOTICE Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment, make sure that these power supplies are disabled. Before removing the PIU board, ensure that all power inputs are disconnected from the board Functions and Features The PIU, a power interface board, supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, surge protection detection, and information reporting. Table 7-62 lists functions and features of the PIU. Table 7-62 Functions and features of the PIU Function and Feature Power access Power protection Surge protection Power backup Description Each of the two PIU accesses one -48 V DC (or -60 V DC) power supply for the equipment. The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and short circuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shocking board and components on it. The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection fails. Two PIUs for a hot backup. One PIU is capable of supplying power for the entire chassis Specifications The technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 7-63 lists the technical specifications of the PIU. Table 7-63 Technical specifications of the PIU Item Board dimensions (mm) Technical Specification 41.4 (H) x (D) x 21.0 (W) Weight (kg) 0.12 Power consumption (W, room temperature) 0.5 Input voltage (V) to

180 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7.15 AND1FAN - Fan Board The NED1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is NED1. The FAN is housed in slot Front Panel On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels. Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 7-21 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN. Figure 7-21 Appearance of the front panel Indicators The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN: FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans. CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms. MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms. MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms. The CRIT, MAJ, and MIN indicators on the front panel of the FAN indicate the current alarm severity of the subrack. For details on indications of indicators, see 11.1 Indicators. 169

181 7 NE08E-S6 Boards ESD Strap Jack Handle Label The ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body. The handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during board replacement. The following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN: ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating Functions and Features Specifications The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans. The functions and features of the FAN are as follows: Accesses two 12 V power supplies for driving six fans. Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and filters the lower frequency. Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system. Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version number, and board in-position information. Provides alarm indicators. The technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 7-64 lists the technical specifications of the FAN. Table 7-64 Technical specifications of the FAN Item Board dimensions (mm) Technical Specification 86.2 (H) x (D) x 28.5 (W) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Low rate: 4.1 Medium rate: 13.6 High rate: 29.6 Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power 170

182 7 NE08E-S6 Boards 7.16 Filler Panel A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis Appearance and Valid Slots Appearance There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel. Figure 7-22 shows the appearance of a filler panel. Figure 7-22 Appearance of a filler panel Valid Slots The filler panel of a control board can be housed in slot 7 or 8 of a chassis and the filler panel of an interface board can be housed in any of slots 1-6 of a chassis. Table 7-65 provides the dimensions of the filler panel for a control board and dimensions of the filler panel for an interface board. Table 7-65 Filler panel dimensions Type Dimensions (H x W x D) Filler panel for a control board Filler panel for an interface board mm x mm x 23.5 mm mm x mm x 23.2 mm Functions and Features A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances, and ensure proper ventilation. Main functions of a filler panel are as follows: Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement of electromagnetic radiation. Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis. Prevents internal voltage from being exposed. Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis. 171

183 8 Swappable Optical Modules 8 Swappable Optical Modules About This Chapter The NE device does not provide optical interfaces, whereas the panel provides interfaces for installing optical modules. The optical modules receive and transmit optical signals and convert electrical and optical signals. 8.1 Overview Optical and electrical modules for NE devices are hot swappable. Optical modules transmit services using optical signals over fibers and electrical modules transmit services using electrical signals over Ethernet cables. 8.2 FE Optical Module 8.3 GE Optical Module GE Optical Module 8.5 GPON Optical Module 8.6 Electrical Module 172

184 8 Swappable Optical Modules 8.1 Overview Classification Optical and electrical modules for NE devices are hot swappable. Optical modules transmit services using optical signals over fibers and electrical modules transmit services using electrical signals over Ethernet cables. NOTE NE devices must use optical or electrical modules introduced in this document. If you use third-party optical or electrical modules, NE devices may fail to identity them, causing the NE devices' interfaces to fail to work properly. Optical modules for NE devices can be classified as follows: By service and rate: FE, GE, 10GE optical modules By packaging: SFP, esfp, XFP, TXFP, SFP+ optical modules SFP optical modules are used to support FE and GE services. esfp optical modules are enhanced SFP optical modules. They provide the same functions as SFP modules except that esfp optical modules are added with the performance reporting function. XFP optical modules are used to support 10GE services. TXFP optical modules are one type of XFP optical modules and support wavelength adjustment. SFP+ optical modules are used to support 10GE services. The volume of an SFP+ optical module is smaller than that of an XFP optical module. The size of an SFP+ optical module is the same as that of an SFP optical module. By usage scenario: business and industry modules If the operating temperature for an NE device is within the range of -20 C to +60 C, business modules apply. If the operating temperature for an NE device is outside the range of -20 C to +60 C, industry modules apply. By WDM application: colorless and colored optical modules Colorless (or gray) optical modules are common optical modules. They support wavelengths within a specific range. Colored optical modules support a specific wavelength (with a small tolerance). On them, wavelength conversion can be ignored and the wavelength can be directly added to a multiplexer/demultiplexer board. Colored optical modules are classified into coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) optical modules by the wavelength division density. By fiber carrier: two-fiber bidirectional and single-fiber bidirectional optical modules A single-fiber bidirectional module provides only one LC interface for connecting to one fiber. It receives and sends optical signals in one fiber but over two different wavelengths. A two-fiber bidirectional module provides two LC interfaces for connecting to two fibers. It receives and sends optical signals in two different fibers. Electrical modules for NE devices are all SFP modules, which are used to support FE or GE services. 173

185 8 Swappable Optical Modules Appearance Optical and electrical modules have different appearance because they use different packaging and cable interfaces. SFP and esfp optical modules have the same appearance. Currently esfp optical modules are used on most of NE devices. Figure 8-1 shows the esfp optical module appearance. Figure 8-1 esfp optical module appearance Single-fiber bidirectional Two-fiber bidirectional Figure 8-2 shows the SFP electrical module appearance. Figure 8-2 SFP electrical module appearance Figure 8-3 shows the XFP optical module appearance. Figure 8-3 XFP optical module appearance 174

186 8 Swappable Optical Modules Figure 8-4 shows the SFP+ optical module appearance. Figure 8-4 SFP+ optical module appearance Single-fiber bidirectional Two-fiber bidirectional 8.2 FE Optical Module FE Optical Module (commercial) Table 8-1 Technical specifications of the FE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX (15 km) (40 km) 100BASE-FX (80 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp esfp Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) 1261 to to to to -8-5 to 0-5 to Optical module code S S

187 8 Swappable Optical Modules Table 8-2 Technical specifications of the FE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-FX STM-1 (15 km) 100BASE-FX STM-1 (10 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched optical power (dbm) -15 to to -8 Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) -8-8 Minimum extinction ratio (db) Optical module code Usage description Used together. NOTE A single-fiber bidirectional module receives and transmits optical signals using different working wavelength ranges over a single optical fiber. The receiving and transmitting working wavelength ranges of single-fiber bidirectional modules at both ends must match. As shown in Table 8-2, and are used together. FE Optical Module (industry) Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the FE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX (15 km) (40 km) 100BASE-FX (80 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp esfp 176

188 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Specification Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) 1261 to to to to -8-5 to 0-5 to Optical module code GE Optical Module FE/GE Optical Module (commercial) Table 8-4 Technical specifications of the FE/GE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASE-BX40-U (40 km) 1000BASE-BX40-D (40 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1580 Tx: 1480 to 1580 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched optical power (dbm) -3 to 2-3 to 2 Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) -3-3 Minimum extinction ratio (db) 8 8 Optical module code

189 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Usage description Specification Used together. NOTE A single-fiber bidirectional module receives and transmits optical signals using different working wavelength ranges over a single optical fiber. The receiving and transmitting working wavelength ranges of single-fiber bidirectional modules at both ends must match. As shown in Table 8-4, and are used together. GE Optical Module (commercial) Table 8-5 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Specification Optical interface type LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASE- SX 1000BASE- LX 1000BASE- VX 1000BASE- ZX 1000BASE- CWDM (0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) Encapsulatio n type esfp esfp esfp esfp esfp Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) 770 to to to to 1580 For details, see wavelength allocation of 1000BASE- CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code to 0-11 to -3-5 to 0-2 to 5 0 to

190 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Minimum extinction ratio (db) Optical module code Specification S For details, see wavelength allocation of 1000BASE- CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code. Table 8-6 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) to to to to to to to to Table 8-7 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Specification Optical interface type LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASE- BX10-U 1000BASE- BX10-D 1000BASE- BX40-U 1000BASE- BX40-D 1000BASE- BX 1000BASE- BX (10 km) (10 km) (40 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp esfp esfp esfp esfp Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to

191 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Mean launched optical power (dbm) Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) Optical module code Usage description Specification -9 to -3-9 to -3-3 to 5-3 to 5-2 to 4-2 to Used together. Used together. Used together. NOTE A single-fiber bidirectional module receives and transmits optical signals using different working wavelength ranges over a single optical fiber. The receiving and transmitting working wavelength ranges of single-fiber bidirectional modules at both ends must match. As shown in Table 8-7, and are used together, and and are used together. GE Optical Module (industry) Table 8-8 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp esfp Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) 1280 to to to to -3-5 to 3-2 to 5 180

192 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) Specification Optical module code Table 8-9 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASE-BX10-U (10 km) 1000BASE-BX10-D (10 km) Encapsulation type esfp esfp Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched optical power (dbm) -9 to -3-9 to -3 Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) -3-3 Minimum extinction ratio (db) 6 6 Optical module code Usage description Used together. NOTE A single-fiber bidirectional module receives and transmits optical signals using different working wavelength ranges over a single optical fiber. The receiving and transmitting working wavelength ranges of single-fiber bidirectional modules at both ends must match. As shown in Table 8-9, and are used together. 181

193 8 Swappable Optical Modules GE Optical Module 10GE XFP Optical Module (commercial) Table 8-10 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface Item Specification Optical interface type LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GE (10 km) 10GE (40 km) 10GE (80 km) 10GE (CWDM) (70 km) 10GE (DWDM) (40 km) 10GE (DWDM) (80 km) Encapsulat ion type XFP XFP XFP XFP TXFP XFP Fiber type Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode Working wavelengt h range (nm) For details, see wavelengt h allocation of 10GE (CWDM) optical interfaces and related optical module code to (waveleng th tunable) For details, see wavelengt h allocation of 10GE (DWDM) optical interfaces and related optical module code. Mean launched optical power (dbm) Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) -6 to -1-1 to 2 0 to 4 0 to 4-1 to 2-1 to

194 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Optical module code Specification S S S For details, see wavelengt h allocation of 10GE (CWDM) optical interfaces and related optical module code For details, see wavelengt h allocation of 10GE (DWDM) optical interfaces and related optical module code. Table 8-11 Wavelength allocation of 10GE (CWDM) optical interfaces and related optical module code SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) Table 8-12 Wavelength allocation of 10GE (DWDM) optical interfaces and related optical module code SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm)

195 8 Swappable Optical Modules SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) SN Optical module code Wavelength (nm) GE SFP+ Optical Module (commercial) Table 8-13 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GE 10GE 10GE (0.3 km) (10 km) (40 km) 10GE (80 km) Encapsulation type SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) to to to 4 0 to Optical module code S S S PVU 10GE SFP+ Optical Module (industry) Table 8-14 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Optical interface type Specification LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GE (0.1 km) 10GE (40 km) 184

196 8 Swappable Optical Modules Item Specification Encapsulation type SFP+ SFP+ Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) -5 to to 4 Receiving sensitivity (dbm) Minimum overload (dbm) Minimum extinction ratio (db) Optical module code GPON Optical Module NOTE Only the GE optical interface on indoor NE support the GPON optical module. GPON Upstream Optical Module (commercial) Table 8-15 Technical specifications of the GPON optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification SC, single-fiber bidirectional interface ONU CLASS B+ (20 km) Encapsulation type Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dbm) SFP Single-mode Tx: 1310 Rx: to 5 Receiving sensitivity (dbm) -29 Minimum overload (dbm) -8 Minimum extinction ratio (db) Optical module code KMF 185

197 8 Swappable Optical Modules 8.6 Electrical Module FE Electrical Module (commercial) Table 8-16 Technical specifications of the FE electrical interface Item Interface rate Encapsulation type RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification 100 Mbit/s SFP Compliance with IEEE Electrical module code GE Electrical Module (commercial) Table 8-17 Technical specifications of the GE electrical interface Item Specification Interface rate 1000 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s Encapsulation type SFP SFP RJ-45 electrical interface specification Compliance with IEEE Compliance with IEEE Electrical module code

198 9 Cables 9 Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes various optical fibers and cables used on the equipment. 9.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables This section describes power supply cables and ground cables used on the equipment. 9.2 Management Cables An NE device uses Ethernet interfaces to input or output NM signals. 9.3 Alarm Input/Output Cables On the devices, the RJ-45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms. 9.4 Clock Cables The clock cables used on NE devices include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm clock cables. 9.5 Service Cables The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, and 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables. 9.6 Optical Fibers On an NE device, optical fibers are used to input and output Ethernet service signals. 187

199 9 Cables 9.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables This section describes power supply cables and ground cables used on the equipment DC Power Cables and Ground Cables DC Power Cables DC power cables are used to provide external power supplies for the NE while the PGND cable is used to ground the NE. Power cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of DC connectors, single cord end terminals, and wires. Figure 9-1 shows the appearance of the power cable intended for a 1 U chassis. Table 9-1 provides the technical specifications of the power cable for a 1 U chassis. Figure 9-2 shows the appearance of the power cable intended for a 2 U chassis. Table 9-2 provides the technical specifications of the power cable for a 2 U chassis. Figure 9-1 Appearance of the power cable intended for a 1 U chassis Single cord end terminal 1U DC connector Power cable Figure 9-2 Appearance of the power cable intended for a 2 U chassis -48V cable (blue) screwdriver 0 V cable (black) 2 U DC connector 188

200 9 Cables Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the power cable intended for a 1 U chassis Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter 2.5 mm 2 (0.004 in. 2 ) power cable and terminal Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/ 750V, H07Z, K, 2.5 mm 2 (0.004 in. 2 ), blue/black green, fire resistant cable with low smoke and no halogen Bare crimp terminal, single cord end terminal, 2.5 mm 2 (0.004 in. 2 ), 12.5 A, tin plating, 8 mm(0.31 in.) deep, blue Table 9-2 Technical specifications of the power cable intended for a 2 U chassis Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter 4 mm 2 (0.006 in. 2 ) power cable and terminal Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/ 750V, H07Z, K, 4 mm 2 (0.006 in. 2 ), blue/black green, fire resistant cable with low smoke and no halogen Bare crimp terminal, single cord end terminal, 4 mm 2 (0.006 in. 2 ), 20 A, tin plating, 10 mm(0.39 in.) deep, gray PGND Cable The PGND cable is used to ground the NE. EDCh PGND cable consists of a cable and one or two OT terminals. Figure 9-3 shows the appearance of the PGND cable and Table 9-3 lists the technical specifications of the PGND cable. Figure 9-3 Appearance of the PGND cable 189

201 9 Cables Table 9-3 Technical specifications of the PGND cable Cable Parameter Electronic/electric cable-450 V/750 V- H07Z-K-4 mm 2 -yellow green-lowsmoke halogen-free fireproof cable Terminal Parameter Bare crimp terminal-ot-6mm 2 -Tin plating- Circular pre-insulated terminal-12-10awg- Yellow AC Power Cables and Ground Cables AC power cables are used to provide external power supplies for the NE while the PGND cable is used to ground the NE. AC Power Cables AC power cables are used to provide external power supplies for the NE. Figure 9-4 shows the appearance of the AC power cable used for an NE and Table 9-4 lists the technical specifications of the AC power cable. Figure 9-4 Appearance of the AC power cable Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the AC power cable Cables Item Description AC power cables Cable model (PI straight male)-(227iec53-1.0^2(3c))- (C13 -straight female) 190

202 9 Cables Cables Item Description Technical specifications of the cable material Flame-retardant rating China national standard AC 250V10A-3.00m-3 1.0mm 2 -black CM Note: 1. The naming rule of the power cable model is: model of connector 1-model of the cable material-model of connector The specifications of AC power cables are different in different countries and regions. The AC power cable that complies with the China national standard is used as an example here. PGND Cable The PGND cable is used to ground the NE. Each PGND cable consists of a cable and one or two OT terminals. Figure 9-5 shows the appearance of the PGND cable and Table 9-5 lists the technical specifications of the PGND cable. Figure 9-5 Appearance of the PGND cable Table 9-5 Technical specifications of the PGND cable Cable Parameter Electronic/electric cable-450 V/750 V- H07Z-K-4 mm 2 -yellow green-lowsmoke halogen-free fireproof cable Terminal Parameter Bare crimp terminal-ot-6mm 2 -Tin plating- Circular pre-insulated terminal-12-10awg- Yellow 191

203 9 Cables 9.2 Management Cables An NE device uses Ethernet interfaces to input or output NM signals. The ETH/OAM management interface, integrating the Ethernet NM interface and console interface, uses the RJ-45 connector. Table 9-8 lists the functions of connector pins. Table 9-6 Connector pin functions Connector Pin Function 1 Transmit positive of the Ethernet NM interface 2 Transmit negative of the Ethernet NM interface 3 Receive positive of the Ethernet NM interface 6 Receive negative of the Ethernet NM interface 4 Console ground end 5 Console receive end 7 Unspecified 8 Console transmit end Management Network Interface Cables Console Cables An ETH/OAM interface that functions as an Ethernet NM interface uses Ethernet cables to ensure communication between an NE device and the NMS. The ETH/OAM interface can connect to straight-through and crossover cables in autosensing mode Ethernet Cables shows Ethernet cables. An ETH/OAM interface that functions as the Console interface uses Console cables to ensure communication between an NE device and the NMS. A Console cable consists of a RS-232 serial cable and a serial adapter cable, as shown in Figure

204 9 Cables Figure 9-6 Console cables Pos.1 Pos Pos.5 Pos.9 X1 X2 Serial adapter cable X3 Serial cable X4 Table 9-7 lists the pin assignment of the serial adapter cable. Table 9-7 Pin assignment of the serial adapter cable Pin of Connector X1 Pin of Connector X2 Color Function X1.4 X2.5 White and green Console ground end X1.5 X2.6 Green Console receive end X1.8 X2.3 White and blue Console transmit end Table 9-8 lists the pin assignment of the RS-232 serial cable. Table 9-8 Pin assignment of the RS-232 serial cable Pin of Connector X3 Pin of Connector X4 Color Function X3.3 X4.2 Black Console transmit end X3.6 X4.3 Brown Console receive end X3.5 X4.5 Red Console ground end 9.3 Alarm Input/Output Cables On the devices, the RJ-45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms. 193

205 9 Cables At one end of the alarm input/output cable, the RJ-45 connector is used to connect to the ALMI/ O interface on the equipment; at the other end, a connector (made as required on site) is used to connect to the external equipment or the equipment that monitors all the alarms. Structure Figure 9-7 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable. Figure 9-7 Structure of the alarm input/output cable RJ-45 Connector Main label 8 W 1 X1 Pin Assignment Table 9-9 lists the pin assignment of the alarm input/output alarm cable connector. Table 9-9 Pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable connector Connector Pin Color Relation Description 1 White-orange Twisted pair Alarm input 1 2 Orange Ground for alarm input 1 3 White-green Twisted pair Alarm input 2 6 Green Ground for alarm input 2 4 Blue Twisted pair Alarm input 3 5 White-blue Ground for alarm input 3 7 White- brown Twisted pair Alarm output positive 8 Brown Alarm output negative 194

206 9 Cables Technical Specifications Table 9-10 lists the technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable. Table 9-10 Technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable Item Connector X1 Specification Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e, 0.52 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, 4 Pairs, PANTONE 430U 9.4 Clock Cables The clock cables used on NE devices include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm clock cables External Clock Cables On the NE device, the external clock cables with RJ45 connectors are used to input and output the external clock or time signals. The external clock cables can be connected to the CLK, and TOD interfaces on an NE device. Structure Figure 9-8 shows the structure of the RJ45 connector used on the external clock cable. Figure 9-8 Structure of the RJ45 Connector PIN#8 PIN#1 Pin Assignment The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site. When the CLK interfaces are used as external clock interfaces, the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector is as listed in Table 9-11; when the TOD interfaces are used as external time interfaces, the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector is as listed in Table

207 9 Cables Table 9-11 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external clock mode) Connector Pin Color Relation Description 1 White-orange Twisted pair Receive negative of CLK 2 Orange Receive positive of CLK 3 White-green Twisted pair Unspecified 6 Green Unspecified 4 Blue Twisted pair Transmit negative of CLK 5 White-blue Transmit positive of CLK 7 White- brown Twisted pair Unspecified 8 Brown Unspecified Table 9-12 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external time mode) Connecto r Pin Color Relation Description 1PPS + Time Information Mode DCLS Mode 1 White-orange Twisted pair Unspecified Unspecified 2 Orange Unspecified Unspecified 3 White-green Twisted pair Negative of 1PPS signals 6 Green Positive of 1PPS signals Negative of DCLS signals Positive of DCLS signals 4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding terminal Grounding terminal 5 White-blue Grounding terminal Grounding terminal 7 White-brown Twisted pair Negative of time information 8 Brown Positive of time information Unspecified Unspecified Technical Specifications Table 9-13 and Table 9-14 lists the technical specifications of the external clock cable. 196

208 9 Cables Table 9-13 Technical specifications of the external shielded clock cable Item Connector Cable type Number of cores Specification Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cabl Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category 5e,FTP,0.52mm( in.), 24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U Eight Table 9-14 Technical specifications of the external non-shielded clock cable Item Connector Cable type Number of cores Specification Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8Pin,Non-Shielded,Crystal Plug Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,,Category 5e UTP,0.51mm( in.), 24AWG,8Cores,PANTONE 430U Eight Clock Bridging Cables Structure On an NE device, the 120-to-75-ohm clock cable is used as the clock bridging cables. Figure 9-9 shows the structure of the 120-to-75-ohm clock bridging cables. Figure 9-9 Structure of the clock bridging cables View A RJ-45 connector Main label Heat-shrink tube Heat-shrink tube 120-ohm or 75- ohm conversion connector W1 Label 8 1 A X1 W5 Heat-shrink tube W2 W3 30 m W4 Pin Assignment Table 9-15 lists the pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector. 197

209 9 Cables Table 9-15 Pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector 120-Ohm Cable 75-Ohm Cable Connector Pin Color Relation Core No. X1.1 Orange Twisted pair W1 X1.2 White X1.4 Blue Twisted pair W2 X1.5 White X1.3 Green Twisted pair W3 X1.6 White X1.7 White Twisted pair W4 X1.8 Brown Technical Specifications Table 9-16 lists the technical specifications of the clock bridging cables. Table 9-16 Technical specifications of the clock bridging cables Item Cable Connector X1 type 120-ohm cable type 75-ohm cable type Specification Single Cable, 120 ohm To 75 ohm Clock Cable, 30 m, MP8-II, 120CC4P0.4P430U(S)+4*SYV75-2/0.34(S) Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm(0.02 in.), 26AWG, 4Pairs, Pantone 430U Coaxial Cable, SYV (4.0Z)-1/0.34 mm, OD3.9 mm(0.15 in.), Double-Layer Copper Braid Shielded 9.5 Service Cables The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, and 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables Ethernet Cables On an NE device, Ethernet cables are used to input and output Ethernet service signals. 198

210 9 Cables Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence of the copper cores in the cables. A network cable with a shield layer is a shielded cable and that without a shield layer is a nonshielded cable. The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment are adaptive to the straight-through cables and crossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type of the network cables to the Ethernet service interfaces as required. Ethernet cables need to be made on site. Structure Figure 9-10 shows the appearance of the shield layer. Figure 9-10 Appearance of the shield layer Figure 9-11 shows the appearance of the non-shielded cable. Figure 9-11 Appearance of the non-shielded cable 199

211 9 Cables RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of a network cable. Figure 9-12 shows an RJ45 connector and Figure 9-13 shows the structure of the network cable. Figure 9-12 RJ45 connector PIN#8 PIN#1 Figure 9-13 Structure of the network cable RJ-45 network interface connector Label 1 Main label Label W 8 1 X1 X2 NOTE For a crossover cable, pins 1 and 2 of the RJ45 connector at one end must be cross-connected to pins 3 and 6 of the RJ45 connector at the other end respectively. Pin Assignment Table 9-17 and Table 9-18 list the pin assignment of the network cable connector. Table 9-17 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector straight-through Cable Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair X1.2 X2.2 Orange X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair X1.6 X2.6 Green X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair 200

212 9 Cables straight-through Cable Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship X1.5 X2.5 White-blue X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair X1.8 X2.8 Brown Table 9-18 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector Crossover Cable for FE Interface Crossover Cable for GE Interface Connecto r X1 Pin Connect or X2 Pin Color Relation ship Connector X1 Pin Connect or X2 Pin Color Relation ship X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted X1.2 X2.6 Orange pair X1.2 X2.6 Orange pair X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted X1.6 X2.2 Green pair X1.6 X2.2 Green pair X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted X1.4 X2.7 Blue Twisted X1.5 X2.5 White-blue pair X1.5 X2.8 White-blue pair X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted X1.7 X2.4 White-brown Twisted X1.8 X2.8 Brown pair X1.8 X2.5 Brown pair Technical Specifications Table 9-19 lists the technical specifications of the shielded cable. Table 9-19 Technical specifications of the shielded cable Item Connector X1/X2 Cable type Number of cores Specification Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cabl Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category 5e,FTP,0.52mm( in.), 24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U Eight Table 9-20 lists the technical specifications of the non-shielded cable. 201

213 9 Cables Table 9-20 Technical specifications of the non-shielded cable Item Connector X1/X2 Cable type Number of cores Specification Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8Pin,Non-Shielded,Crystal Plug Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,,Category 5e UTP,0.51mm( in.), 24AWG,8Cores,PANTONE 430U Eight Ohm 8 x E1 Cables Structure The 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals. Use the DB44 connector at one end to connect the cable to the 75-ohm 8 x E1 electrical interface board. Use a connector to connect the other end to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The connector should be made according to the on-site requirements. Figure 9-14 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable. Figure 9-14 Structure of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable Pos.44 A-A D type-44pin-male Cable connector- A Pos.1 Main label W X Pin Assignment Table 9-21 lists the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable connector. 202

214 9 Cables Table 9-21 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable connector Connecto r Pin Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Serial No. Core Serial No. Remarks 38 Ring 1 R0 34 Ring 9 R4 23 Tip 19 Tip 37 Ring 3 R1 33 Ring 11 R5 22 Tip 18 Tip 36 Ring 5 R2 32 Ring 13 R6 21 Tip 17 Tip 35 Ring 7 R3 31 Ring 15 R7 20 Tip 16 Tip 15 Ring 2 T0 11 Ring 10 T4 30 Tip 26 Tip 14 Ring 4 T1 10 Ring 12 T5 29 Tip 25 Tip 13 Ring 6 T2 9 Ring 14 T6 28 Tip 24 Tip 12 Ring 8 T3 8 Ring 16 T7 27 Tip 7 Tip Shell External braid shield layer Technical Specifications Table 9-22 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable Item Cable Connector Specification Trunk Cable, 75-ohm, 8E1, 2.2 mm, D44M-I, SYFVZP75-1.2/0.25*16(S)-I, -45 deg Trunk Cable, 75-ohm, 8E1, 2.2 mm, D44M-I, SYFVZP75-1.2/0.25*16(S)-I, +45 deg Cable connector-d type-44pin-male Cable type Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-LC *16, 75 ohm, mm, 1.2 mm, mm, Pantone Warm Gray 1U 203

215 9 Cables Item Fireproof class Specification CM Number of cores 16 Cover diameterinsulation diameterconductor diameter 13.1 mm mm mm Ohm 8 x E1 Cables Structure The 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals. Use the DB44 connector at one end to connect the cable to the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface board. Use a connector to connect the other end to the DDF. The connector should be made according to the on-site requirements. Figure 9-15 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable and Figure 9-16 shows the structure of the cable. Figure 9-15 Appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable 204

216 9 Cables Figure 9-16 Structure of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable A-A Pos.1 Cable connector- D type-44pin-male Pos.44 A Lable 1 Lable 2 Main lable W1 X W2 Pin assignment Table 9-23 lists the pin assignment of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable connector. Table 9-23 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable connector Connector Pin Cable Remarks Connector Pin Cable Remarks Core Core 15 Blue T0 38 Blue R0 30 White 23 White 14 Orange T1 37 Orange R1 29 White 22 White 13 Green T2 36 Green R2 28 White 21 White 12 Brown T3 35 Brown R3 27 White 20 White 11 Grey T4 34 Grey R4 26 White 19 White 10 Blue T5 33 Blue R5 25 Red 18 Red 9 Orange T6 32 Orange R6 205

217 9 Cables Connector Pin Cable Remarks Connector Pin Cable Remarks Core Core 24 Red 17 Red 8 Green T7 31 Green R7 7 Red 16 Red Shell External braid shield layer Shell External braid shield layer Technical Specifications Table 9-24 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable Item Cable Connector Cable type Number of cores Inner conductor diameter Fireproof class Specification Trunk Cable, 120-ohm, 8E1, 0.4 mm, D44M-I, 2*120CC8P0.4P430U(S), -45deg Trunk Cable, 120-ohm, 8E1, 0.4 mm, D44M-I, 2*120CC8P0.4P430U(S), 45deg Cable connector-d type-44pin-male Communication cable-120 ohm-seyvp-24awg-16 core- PANTONE 430U 16 twisted pairs 0.4 mm(0.02 in.) CM Ohm 16 x E1 Cables Structure On the device, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 75-ohm E1 signals. At one end of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 75-ohm E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the digital distribution frame (DDF). Make the connector as required on site. Figure 9-17 shows the appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 9-18 shows the structure of the cable. 206

218 9 Cables Figure 9-17 Appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable Figure 9-18 Structure of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable Main label 1 W X1 A View A Pos.96 Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Female Connector Pos.1 Pin Assignment Table 9-25 lists the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector. Table 9-25 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable connector Connecto r Pin Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Serial No. Core Serial No. Remarks 1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0 2 Ring 26 Ring 3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1 4 Ring 28 Ring 207

219 9 Cables Connecto r Pin Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Serial No. Core Serial No. Remarks 5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2 6 Ring 30 Ring 7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3 8 Ring 32 Ring 9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4 10 Ring 34 Ring 11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5 12 Ring 36 Ring 13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6 14 Ring 38 Ring 15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7 16 Ring 40 Ring 17 Tip 17 R8 41 Tip 18 T8 18 Ring 42 Ring 19 Tip 19 R9 43 Tip 20 T9 20 Ring 44 Ring 21 Tip 21 R10 45 Tip 22 T10 22 Ring 46 Ring 23 Tip 23 R11 47 Tip 24 T11 24 Ring 48 Ring 49 Tip 25 R12 73 Tip 26 T12 50 Ring 74 Ring 51 Tip 27 R13 75 Tip 28 T13 52 Ring 76 Ring 53 Tip 29 R14 77 Tip 30 T14 54 Ring 78 Ring 55 Tip 31 R15 79 Tip 32 T15 56 Ring 80 Ring 208

220 9 Cables Connecto r Pin Shell Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Serial No. Core Serial No. External braid shield layer Remarks Technical Specifications Table 9-26 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable Item Specification Cable Trunk Cable, 75ohm, 16E1, 1.6mm,Anea 96F- I,SYFVZP75-1.1/0.26*32(S), +45deg Connector Cable type Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And Shielding Case, IDC Type, For AWG Solid Wire, 1 A Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-MC *32, 75 ohm, mm(0.49 in.), 1.1 mm(0.04 in.), 0.26 mm(0.01 in.), Pantone Warm Gray 1U, Only for OEM 12.4 mm(0.49 in.) mm(0.06 in.) mm(0.01 in.) Number of cores 32 Available length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m ft.,32.80 ft.,49.21 ft.,65.62 ft.,82.02 ft.,98.42 ft., ft., ft ft., ft Ohm 16 x E1 Cables Structure On the device, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 120-ohm E1 signals. At one end of the a 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 120- ohm E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the DDF. Make the connector as required on site. Figure 9-19 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 9-20 shows the structure of the cable. 209

221 9 Cables Figure 9-19 Appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable Figure 9-20 Structure of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable Main label 1 W X1 A View A Pos.96 Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Female Connector Pos.1 Pin assignment Table 9-27 lists the pin assignment of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector. Table 9-27 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable connector Connecto r Pin Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Bundle Core Bundle Remarks 1 White Blue R0 25 White Blue T0 2 Blue 26 Orange 3 White R1 27 White T1 4 Green 28 Brown 210

222 9 Cables Connecto r Pin Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Bundle Core Bundle Remarks 5 White R2 29 Red T2 6 Grey 30 Blue 7 Red R3 31 Red T3 8 Orange 32 Green 9 Red R4 33 Red T4 10 Brown 34 Grey 11 Black R5 35 Black T5 12 Blue 36 Orange 13 Black R6 37 Black T6 14 Green 38 Brown 15 Black R7 39 Yellow T7 16 Grey 40 Blue 17 White Orange R8 41 White Orange T8 18 Blue 42 Orange 19 White R9 43 White T9 20 Green 44 Brown 21 White R10 45 Red T10 22 Grey 46 Blue 23 Red R11 47 Red T11 24 Orange 48 Green 49 Red R12 73 Red T12 50 Brown 74 Grey 51 Black R13 75 Black T13 52 Blue 76 Orange 53 Black R14 77 Black T14 54 Green 78 Brown 55 Black R15 79 Yellow T15 56 Grey 80 Blue 211

223 9 Cables Connecto r Pin Shell Cable Remarks Connecto Cable r Pin Core Bundle Core Bundle External braid shield layer Remarks Technical Specifications Table 9-28 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable Item Specification Cable Trunk Cable, 120 ohm, 16E1, 0.4 mm(0.02 in.), Anea 96F, 120CC32P0.4P430U(S), +45deg Connector Cable type Core diameter of the inner conductor Number of cores Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And Shielding Case, IDC Type, For AWG Solid Wire - 1 A Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm(0.02 in.), 26AWG, 32Pairs, Pantone 430U 0.4 mm(0.02 in.) 32 twisted pairs xdsl Cables Structure On a devices, the telephone wires with RJ-11/RJ-45 connectors are used to input and output xdsl service signals. The connectors at both ends of the cable applicable to the NED1SHD4, and NED1SHD4I are RJ-11 connectors. The connectors at both ends of the cable applicable to the NED1AVD8A are RJ-45 connectors. Figure 9-21 shows the structure of the xdsl cable. 212

224 9 Cables Figure 9-21 Structure of the xdsl cable 1 Main label 6 W X1 X2 15 m 1. Telephone wire RJ-11 crystal connector 1 Main label 8 W 8 1 X1 X m 1. Network wire RJ-45 crystal connector Pin Assignment Table 9-29 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-11 connector and Table 9-30 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector. Table 9-29 Pin assignment of the RJ-11 connector Connector X1 Connector X2 Description X1.1 X2.1 Unspecified X1.2 X2.2 Unspecified X1.3 X2.3 Tip X1.4 X2.4 Ring X1.5 X2.5 Unspecified X1.6 X2.6 Unspecified 213

225 9 Cables Table 9-30 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector Connector X1 Connector X2 Description X1.1 X2.1 Unspecified X1.2 X2.2 Unspecified X1.3 X2.3 Unspecified X1.4 X2.4 Ring X1.5 X2.5 Tip X1.6 X2.6 Unspecified X1.7 X2.7 Unspecified X1.8 X2.8 Unspecified Technical Specifications Table 9-31 lists the technical specifications of the xdsl cable (telephone wire). Table 9-31 Technical specifications of the xdsl cable Item RJ-11 Connector X1/ X2 RJ-45 Connector X1/ X2 Specification Network Interface Connector, 6-Bit 4PIN, Crystal Model Connector, Matching 26-28AWG Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model Connector Cable Electronic and Power Cable, 150 V,UL20251, 28AWG, Black, 1 A, 2 Cores Telephone Cable Number of cores X.21 DTE Cable An X.21 DTE cable is used when the local X.21 interface works in DTE mode. An X.21 DTE cable uses the DB28 connector on one end to connect to the local X.21 interface and uses the DB15 connector on the other end to connect to the remote DCE. Appearance and Structure Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 shows the appearance and structure of an X.21 DTE cable, respectively. 214

226 9 Cables Figure 9-22 X.21 DTE cable appearance Figure 9-23 X.21 DTE cable structure Pin Assignment Table 9-32 lists the pin assignment for an X.21 DTE cable. Table 9-32 Pin assignment Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.13 X2.3 RTS X1.14 X

227 9 Cables Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.23 X2.5 CTS X1.24 X2.12 X1.19 X2.4 RXD X1.20 X2.11 X1.1 X2.2 TXD X1.2 X2.9 X1.17 X2.6 RXC X1.18 X2.13 X1.21 X2.1 GND X1.6 X2.8 GND X1.10 X1.9 Specifications Table 9-33 lists the technical specifications of an X.21 DTE cable. Table 9-33 Technical specifications Item Cable name Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Single Cable,X.21 Serial Port Cable,3m,D15M,CC(5P+8C)0.32P296U (S),D28M,DTE Cable Connector,MDR,28PIN,Vertical Male Cable Connector,Dsub Connector,15PIN,Male Connector Communication Cable,100ohm,28AWG,5P+8C,PANTONE 296U X.21 DCE Cable An X.21 DTE cable is used when the local X.21 interface works in DCE mode. An X.21 DCE cable uses the DB28 connector on one end to connect to the local X.21 interface and uses the DB15 connector on the other end to connect to the remote DTE. 216

228 9 Cables Appearance and Structure Figure 9-24 and Figure 9-25 shows the appearance and structure of an X.21 DCE cable, respectively. Figure 9-24 X.21 DCE cable appearance Figure 9-25 X.21 DCE cable structure Pin Assignment Table 9-34 lists the pin assignment for an X.21 DCE cable. Table 9-34 Pin assignment Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.13 X2.5 RTS X1.14 X2.12 X1.23 X2.3 CTS 217

229 9 Cables Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.24 X2.10 X1.19 X2.2 RXD X1.20 X2.9 X1.1 X2.4 TXD X1.2 X2.11 X1.15 X2.6 TXCE X1.16 X2.13 X1.21 X2.1 GND X1.6 X2.8 GND X1.9 Specifications Table 9-35 lists the technical specifications of an X.21 DCE cable. Table 9-35 Technical specifications Item Cable name Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Single Cable,X.21 Serial Port Cable,3m,D15F,CC(5P+8C)0.32P296U (S),D28M,DCE Cable Connector,MDR,28PIN,Vertical Male Cable Connector,Dsub Connector,15PIN,Vertical Female Connector Communication Cable,100ohm,28AWG,5P+8C,PANTONE 296U V.24 DTE Cable A V.24 DTE cable is used when the local V.24 interface works in DTE mode. A V.24 DTE cable uses the DB28 connector on one end to connect to the local V.24 interface and uses the DB25 connector on the other end to connect to the remote DCE. Appearance and Structure Figure 9-26 and Figure 9-27 shows the appearance and structure of a V.24 DTE cable, respectively. 218

230 9 Cables Figure 9-26 V.24 DTE cable appearance Figure 9-27 V.24 DTE cable structure Pin Assignment Table 9-36 lists the pin assignment for a V.24 DTE cable. Table 9-36 Pin assignment Connector X1 Pin Signal Direction Connector X2 Pin X1.1 TXD X2.2 TXD 219

231 9 Cables Connector X1 Pin Signal Direction Connector X2 Pin X1.19 RXD X2.3 RXD X1.13 RTS X2.4 RTS X1.23 CTS X2.5 CTS X1.27 DTR X2.20 DTR X1.25 DSR X2.6 DSR X1.11 DCD X2.8 DCD X1.22 LL X2.18 LL X1.3 TXC X2.15 TCK X1.15 TXCE X2.24 XCK X1.17 RXC X2.17 RCK X1.21 GND - X2.1 GND X1.6 GND - X2.7 GND X1.10 X1.7 Specifications Table 9-37 lists the technical specifications of a V.24 DTE cable. Table 9-37 Technical specifications Item Cable name Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Single Cable,V.24 Serial Port Cable,3m,D25M,CC(5P+8C)0.32P296U (S),D28M,DTE Cable Connector,MDR,28PIN,Vertical Male Cable Connector,D Connector,25PIN,Male Connector Communication Cable,100ohm,28AWG,5P+8C,PANTONE 296U V.24 DCE Cable An V.24 DCE cable is used when the local V.24 interface works in DCE mode. An V.24 DCE cable uses the DB28 connector on one end to connect to the local V.24 interface and uses the DB25 connector on the other end to connect to the remote DTE. 220

232 9 Cables Appearance and Structure Figure 9-28 and Figure 9-29 shows the appearance and structure of an V.24 DCE cable, respectively. Figure 9-28 V.24 DCE cable appearance Figure 9-29 V.24 DCE cable structure Pin Assignment Table 9-38 lists the pin assignment for an V.24 DCE cable. 221

233 9 Cables Table 9-38 Pin assignment Connector X1 Pin Signal Direction Connector X2 Pin X1.19 RXD X2.2 TXD X1.1 TXD X2.3 RXD X1.23 CTS X2.4 RTS X1.13 RTS X2.5 CTS X1.25 DSR X2.20 DTR X1.27 DTR X2.6 DSR X1.11 DCD X2.8 DCD X1.22 LL X2.18 LL X1.3 TXC X2.15 TCK X1.17 RXC X2.24 XCK X1.15 TXCE X2.17 RCK X1.21 GND - X2.1 GND X1.6 GND - X2.7 GND X1.7 Specifications Table 9-39 lists the technical specifications of a V.24 DCE cable. Table 9-39 Technical specifications Item Cable name Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Single Cable,V.24 Serial Port Cable,3m,D25F,CC(5P+8C)0.32P296U (S),D28M,DCE Cable Connector,MDR,28PIN,Vertical Male Cable connector,dsub Connector,25PIN,Vertical Female Communication Cable,100ohm,28AWG,5P+8C,PANTONE 296U V.35 DTE Cable A V.35 DTE cable is used when the local V.35 interface works in DTE mode. 222

234 9 Cables Appearance and Structure A V.35 DTE cable uses the DB28 connector on one end to connect to the local V.35 interface and uses the DB34 connector on the other end to connect to the remote DCE. Figure 9-30 and Figure 9-31 shows the appearance and structure of a V.35 DTE cable, respectively. Figure 9-30 V.35 DTE cable appearance Figure 9-31 V.35 DTE cable structure Pin Assignment Table 9-40 lists the pin assignment for a V.35 DTE cable. 223

235 9 Cables Table 9-40 Pin assignment Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.1 X2.P TXD X1.2 X2.S X1.19 X2.R RXD X1.20 X2.T X1.17 X2.V RXC X1.18 X2.X X1.3 X2.Y TXC X1.4 X2.AA X1.15 X2.U TXCE X1.16 X2.W X1.11 X2.F DCD X1.22 X2.J LL X1.13 X2.C RTS X1.23 X2.D CTS X1.27 X2.H DTR X1.25 X2.E DSR X1.21 X2.B GND X1.6 X2.A GND X1.10 X1.7 X1.8 Specifications Table 9-41 lists the technical specifications of a V.35 DTE cable. Table 9-41 Technical specifications Item Cable name Parameter Single Cable,V.24 Serial Port Cable,3m,D25M,CC(5P+8C)0.32P296U (S),D28M,DTE 224

236 9 Cables Item Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Cable Connector,MDR,28PIN,Vertical Male Cable Connector,V35DTE Plug,34PIN,Male Communication Cable,100ohm,28AWG,5P+8C,PANTONE 296U V.35 DCE Cable Appearance and Structure A V.35 DCE cable is used when the local V.35 interface works in DCE mode. A V.35 DCE cable uses the DB28 connector on one end to connect to the local V.35 interface and uses the DB34 connector on the other end to connect to the remote DTE. Figure 9-32 and Figure 9-33 shows the appearance and structure of a V.35 DCE cable, respectively. Figure 9-32 V.35 DCE cable appearance 225

237 9 Cables Figure 9-33 V.35 DCE cable structure Pin Assignment Table 9-42 lists the pin assignment for a V.35 DCE cable. Table 9-42 Pin assignment Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.19 X2.P TXD X1.20 X2.S X1.1 X2.R RXD X1.2 X2.T X1.15 X2.V RXC X1.16 X2.X X1.3 X2.Y TXC X1.4 X2.AA X1.17 X2.U TXCE X1.18 X2.W X1.11 X2.F DCD X1.22 X2.J LL X1.23 X2.C RTS X1.13 X2.D CTS X1.25 X2.H DTR 226

238 9 Cables Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Function X1.27 X2.E DSR X1.21 X2.B GND X1.6 X2.A GND X1.7 X1.8 Specifications Table 9-43 lists the technical specifications of a V.35 DCE cable. Table 9-43 Technical specifications Item Cable name Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Single Cable,V.35 Serial Port Cable,3m,D28M,CC(5P+8C)0.32P296U (S),D34F+D34PS,DCE Cable Connector,MDR,28PIN,Vertical Male Cable Connector,V35DCE Plug,34PIN,Female Communication Cable,100ohm,28AWG,5P+8C,PANTONE 296U RS-232 Serial Interface Cable Appearance and Structure An RS-232 serial interface cable is used by RS-232 serial interfaces. An RS-232 serial interface cable uses the RJ-45 connector on one end to connect to the local RS-232 interface and uses the DB9 connector on the other end to connect to the remote device. Figure 9-34 andfigure 9-35 shows the appearance and structure of an RS-232 serial interface cable, respectively. 227

239 9 Cables Figure 9-34 Appearance of an RS-232 serial interface cable Figure 9-35 Structure of an RS-232 serial interface cable Pin Assignment Table 9-44 lists the pin assignment for an RS-232 serial interface cable. Table 9-44 Pin assignment Connector X3 Pin Connector X4 Pin Function X3.3 X4.2 Console ground terminal X3.6 X4.3 Console receive end X3.5 X4.5 Console transmit end 228

240 9 Cables Specifications Table 9-45 lists the technical specifications of an RS-232 serial interface cable. Table 9-45 Technical specifications Item Cable name Connector X1 Connector X2 Cable Parameter Single Cable,Serial Port Cable,3m,D9F,CC2P0.32PWG1U,MP8-VI Network Interface Connector,Single Row,Single Port,8Bit, 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,Matching AWG 26-28, Leads Twisted Inside Cable Twisted-Pair Cable,UL2464,0.32mm,28AWG,2 Pairs,PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U Standard Telephone Line Structure A standard telephone line is used to input and output voice signals. Figure 9-36 shows the structure of a standard telephone line. Figure 9-36 Structure of a standard telephone line 1 Main label 6 W X1 X2 15 m Pin Assignment Table 9-46 lists the pin assignment for a standard telephone line. Table 9-46 Pin assignment for a standard telephone line Connector X1 Connector X2 Description X1.1 X2.1 Unspecified 229

241 9 Cables Connector X1 Connector X2 Description X1.2 X2.2 Unspecified X1.3 X2.3 Tip X1.4 X2.4 Ring X1.5 X2.5 Unspecified X1.6 X2.6 Unspecified Specifications Table 9-47 lists the technical specifications of a standard telephone line. Table 9-47 Technical specifications of an xdsl telephone line Item RJ-11 connector X1/ X2 Cable Core Parameter Network Interface Connector,Single Row,Single Port,6Bit, 6PIN,Unshielded,Modular Plug, Accept AWG 26~28 Stranded Inner Conductor Electronic Electric Cable,150V,UL20251,2x28AWG,White (2Cores:Yellow,Green),1A,Telephone Cable 2 cores 9.6 Optical Fibers On an NE device, optical fibers are used to input and output Ethernet service signals. Indoor optical fibers include single-mode optical fibers and multi-mode optical fibers. The appearances of a single-mode optical fiber and a multi-mode optical fiber are the same, but their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical fiber is orange. Figure 9-37 shows the appearance of a single-mode optical fiber. 230

242 9 Cables Figure 9-37 Appearance of a single-mode optical fiber with LC/PC connectors LC/PC connectors are used at both ends of the optical fiber shown in Figure For an optical fiber that connects an optical port on an NE device to an optical port of another type on the peer device, an LC/PC connector is used at one end and a connector of another type is used at the other end. Table 9-48 lists the common optical connectors. Table 9-48 Common optical connectors Appearance Type Description LC/PC connector SC/PC connector Plug-in square fiber connector/ protruding polished Square fiber connector/protruding polished FC/PC connector Round fiber connector/protruding polished 231

243 10 Equipment Support 10 Equipment Support About This Chapter NEs can work with various equipment to implement various applications Cabinet Support This section provides common cabinets that can house NEs Power Distribution Equipment This section introduces equipment that supplies power to NE devices. 232

244 10 Equipment Support 10.1 Cabinet Support This section provides common cabinets that can house NEs APM30H Outdoor Cabinet The APM30H outdoor cabinet supports IP55 protection rating and can be used outdoors. The APM30H is an outdoor cabinet with heat exchangers. It supports AC power supply and DC power distribution, and can provide a 7 U installation space for user devices. Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2 show the appearance and internal structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Figure 10-1 Appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet 233

245 10 Equipment Support Figure 10-2 Internal structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet 7 U Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the APM30H outdoor cabinet. Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the APM30H outdoor cabinet Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Available installation space Allowable internal heat consumption Protection rating Specifications 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm 7 U (1 U = mm) 700 W IP IMB Network Cabinet The IMB network cabinet supports the IP31 protection rating, and can be wall mounted indoors, in the corridor, and in the weak current well. A small-sized IMB network cabinet has a compact structure and occupies only a little installation space. In addition, it can be installed on an uneven wall with an undulation smaller than 10 mm, so it has low requirements on site selection. The IMB network cabinet provides a 3 U installation space for user devices. The internal 2 U installation space is for the NE and the external 1 U installation space is for a power supply device. Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-4 show the appearance and structure of an IMB network cabinet. 234

246 10 Equipment Support Figure 10-3 Appearance of an IMB network cabinet Figure 10-4 Internal structure of an IMB network cabinet Table 10-2 lists the technical specifications of the IMB network cabinet. Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the IMB network cabinet Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Available installation space Allowable internal heat consumption Specifications 560 mm x 180 mm x 425 mm 3 U (1 U = mm) 300 W 235

247 10 Equipment Support Item Protection rating Specifications IP inch Open Rack 19-inch open racks apply to Class-A indoor installation environment. A 19-inch open rack provides a 45 U installation space for user devices. Figure 10-5 shows the appearance of a 19-inch open rack. Figure 10-5 Appearance of a 19-inch open rack Table 10-3 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch open rack. Table 10-3 Technical specifications of the 19-inch open rack Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Available installation space Specifications 2,200 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm 45 U (1 U = mm) 236

248 10 Equipment Support N63E Cabinet N63E-22 cabinet apply to Class-A indoor installation environment. The N63E-22 cabinet has a height of 2.2 m. Figure 10-6 shows the appearance of a N63E-22 cabinet. Figure 10-6 Appearance of a N63E-22 cabinet 237

249 10 Equipment Support Table 10-4 lists the technical specifications of the N63E-22 cabinet. Table 10-4 Technical specifications of the N63E-22 cabinet Item Specifications Standard compliance ETSI cabinet (21-inch): ETSI Weight (empty cabinet) Dimensions (W x D x H) Distance between mounting bar holes Available space Fixing centers 45 kg 600 mm x 300 mm x 2200 mm 1 SU = 25 mm. (SU: Standard U.) 83 SU 515 mm R01S100 Outdoor Cabinet The R01S100 outdoor cabinet, complying with the IP55 protection ratings, supports flexible installation, such as outdoor installation on a wall, pole, or concrete pedestal. Figure 10-7 shows the appearance of the R01S100 outdoor cabinet. The cabinet shell is a galvanized steel plate with the coating of polyester powder, well protecting the cabinet against corrosion. 238

250 10 Equipment Support Figure 10-7 Appearance of the R01S100 outdoor cabinet The R01S100 outdoor cabinet uses a wall-mounted heat exchanger to passively dissipate heat. In high-temperature (higher than 45 C) areas, you can install enhanced heat dissipation modules on the outdoor cabinet to improve its heat dissipation capability. The R01S100 outdoor cabinet provides a 4 U installation space, with the inner 2 U for the power distribution box and power system and the outer 2 U for the NE. Figure 10-8 shows the internal structure of the R01S100 outdoor cabinet. 239

251 10 Equipment Support Figure 10-8 Internal structure of an R01S100 outdoor cabinet Enhanced heat dissipation module Installation space Battery compartment Table 10-5 lists the technical specifications of the R01S100 outdoor cabinet. Table 10-5 Technical specifications of the R01S100 outdoor cabinet Item Battery compartment dimensions Enhanced heat dissipation module dimensions Cabinet dimensions (with the enhanced heat dissipation module and battery compartment) Installation space Specification 203 mm (H) x 250 mm (D) x 670 mm (W) 80 mm (H) x 250 mm (D) x 670 mm (W) 1113 mm (H) x 250 mm (D) x 670 mm (W) 4 U (1 U = mm) 245 mm height for the outer 3 U and 145 mm height for the inner 1 U 240

252 10 Equipment Support Item Allowable internal heat consumption Allowable internal heat consumption (with the enhanced heat dissipation module) Protection ratings Specification 200 W 300 W IP R01S200 Outdoor Cabinet The R01S200 outdoor cabinet, complying with the IP55 protection ratings, supports flexible installation, such as outdoor installation on a wall, pole, or concrete pedestal. Figure 10-9 shows the appearance of the R01S200 outdoor cabinet. The cabinet shell is a galvanized steel plate with the coating of polyester powder, well protecting the cabinet against corrosion. 241

253 10 Equipment Support Figure 10-9 Appearance of the R01S200 outdoor cabinet The R01S200 outdoor cabinet uses a wall-mounted heat exchanger to passively dissipate heat. In high-temperature (higher than 40 ºC) areas, you can install enhanced heat dissipation modules on the outdoor cabinet to improve its heat dissipation capability. The R01S200 outdoor cabinet provides a 6 U installation space, with the right 2 U for the power distribution box and power system and the left 2 U for the NE. Figure shows the internal structure of the R01S200 outdoor cabinet. 242

254 10 Equipment Support Figure Internal structure of the R01S200 outdoor cabinet Enhanced heat dissipation module Installation space Battery compartment Table 10-6 lists the technical specifications of the R01S200 outdoor cabinet. Table 10-6 Technical specifications of the R01S200 outdoor cabinet Item Battery compartment dimensions Enhanced heat dissipation module dimensions Cabinet dimensions (with the enhanced heat dissipation module and battery compartment) Installation space Allowable internal heat consumption Specification 270 mm (H) x 350 mm (D) x 750 mm (W) 80 mm (H) x 350 mm (D) x 750 mm (W) 1200 mm (H) x 350 mm (D) x 750 mm (W) 6 U (1 U = mm) 265 mm height for the left 5 U and 170 mm height for the right 1 U 390 W/40 ºC (with solar radiation) 243

255 10 Equipment Support Item Allowable internal heat consumption (with the enhanced heat dissipation module) Protection ratings Specification 500 W/45 ºC (with solar radiation) 420 W/50 ºC (with solar radiation) IP Power Distribution Equipment This section introduces equipment that supplies power to NE devices EPS AF Power System Appearance The EPS AF external power system converts input 220 V AC power to V DC power and supplies power to the NE device. When the 220 V AC input power supply fails, the EPS AF automatically supplies to the NE the backup power of storage batteries. An EPS AF power system consists of a rectifier module, monitoring module, and AC/DC power distribution frame. Figure and Table 10-7 show the appearance and structure of an EPS AF, respectively. Figure Appearance of an EPS AF 244

256 10 Equipment Support NOTICE Interfaces on the monitoring module are reserved temporarily. Do not use these interfaces. Otherwise, the power system may be reset or damaged. Table 10-7 Structure of an EPS AF Component Rectifier module Monitoring module AC/DC power distribution frame Description Converts AC power to DC power. One or two rectifier modules can be configured in an EPS AF power system. Detects the status of the power system and storage batteries. Two RS232/RS485 communication interfaces and one DB50 interface are reserved on the monitoring module. Provides AC power input interface, load interfaces, storage battery interface, and replaceable fuses. Indicators Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the EPS AF. Table 10-8 and Table 10-9 list the indications of indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules respectively. Table 10-8 Indicators for the rectifier modules Indicator Indication Color Normal State Abnormal State Cause of Exception RUN ALM Running indicator Protection indicator Green On Off The rectifier modules are running normally. Yellow Off On A fault that can be rectified occurs on a rectifier module. Blinking Communication on a rectifier module is interrupted. FAULT Fault indicator Red Off On A fault that cannot be rectified occurs on a rectifier module. Note 1: When a severe fault occurs, the indicator (red) is on and the indicators (yellow and green) are off. The indicators (yellow and green) are on only when the indicator (red) is off. Note 2: The indicator (yellow) is always on when communication on a rectifier module is interrupted, a rectifier module is overheated or endures overcurrent or undercurrent, or a rectifier module is disabled. 245

257 10 Equipment Support Table 10-9 Indicators for the monitoring module Indicat or Indicatio n Color Normal State Abnorm al State Cause of Exception RUN Running indicator Green Blinking regularly Off The monitoring module is running abnormally. Fast blinking Abnormal communication ALM Alarm indicator Red Off On The EPS AF reports an alarm. Interfaces Table lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the EPS AF. Table Interfaces on the front panel of the EPS AF Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces Interface Type Description Remarks AC INPUT V AC power input interface RS232/RS485 2 RJ-45 RS232/RS485 communication interfaces. The monitoring module communicates with the equipment, reports alarms, and implements remote control through these interfaces. The interface on the left is the active interface and the interface on the right is the standby interface. The active and standby interfaces cannot be used at the same time. COM 1 DB50 The monitoring module is connected to various sensors through the COM interface. - Reserved interfaces Reserved interface LOAD1 1 - Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC LOAD2 1 - Output interface for load 2 power for two PIUs. For how to connect the load interfaces to the PIUs, see the Installation Guide. 246

258 10 Equipment Support Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces Interface Type Description Remarks BATT 1 - Interface for connecting to the storage batteries The pins marked with + and - are connected to the 48V+ and 48Vpoles of the cable connector respectively. Table lists the relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and fuses. Output branch fuses There are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the EPS AF. The fuses disable/ enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the load and storage batteries. Table Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and fuses Output Branch Fuse Load Branch FU-1 (10 A) LOAD1 (10 A) FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A) FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A) DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the monitoring module of the EPS AF. Figure shows the default setting and location of the DIP switch. Figure Default setting and location of the DIP switch 247

259 10 Equipment Support NOTICE Do not change the default setting of the DIP switch. Otherwise, the EPS AF is affected. Technical Specifications The DIP switch indicates eight bits in binary format (on: 1; off: 0). The default value of the eight bits is The functions of the eight bits are as follows: The first five bits indicate the local and remote power addresses. Bit 5 is the highest bit and bit 1 is the lowest bit. Bit 6 sets the baud rate of communication between the monitoring module and equipment. When bit 6 is 1, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s; when bit 6 is 0, the baud rate is bit/s. Bits 7 and 8 are reserved. Table lists the technical specifications of the EPS AF. Table Technical specifications of the EPS AF Item Specification AC input Rated input voltage 220 (90 to 280) V AC Maximum input current Frequency 10 A 50/60 Hz Battery input Rated input voltage -48 V DC output Capacity Number of batteries Rated output voltage Output current 40 Ah V DC LOAD1: 10 A (determined by the fuse) LOAD 2: 20 A (determined by the fuse) Dimensions of the EPS AF (mounting ears included) Weight of the EPS AF 43.6 mm (H) x mm (W) x 270 mm (D) < 10 kg ETP AF Power System The ETP AF external power system converts input 220 V AC power to V DC power and supplies power to the NE. When the 220 V AC input power supply fails, the ETP AF automatically supplies to the NE the backup power of storage batteries. An 248

260 10 Equipment Support ETP AF power system consists of a rectifier module, monitoring module, and AC/DC power distribution frame. Appearance Figure and Table show the appearance and structure of an ETP AF, respectively. Figure Appearance of an ETP AF Monitoring module Rectifier module AC/DC power distribution frame NOTICE Interfaces on the monitoring module are reserved temporarily. Do not use these interfaces. Otherwise, the power system may be reset or damaged. Table Structure of an ETP AF Component Rectifier module Monitoring module AC/DC power distribution frame Description Converts AC power to DC power. One or two rectifier modules can be configured in an ETP AF power system. Detects the status of the power system and storage batteries. Two RS232/RS485 communication interfaces and one DB50 interface are reserved on the monitoring module. Provides AC power input interface, load interfaces, storage battery interface, and replaceable fuses. Indicators Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the ETP AF. Table and Table list the indications of indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules respectively. 249

261 10 Equipment Support Table Indicators for the rectifier modules Indicator Color Status Description Power indicator Green Steady on The rectifier has an AC power input. Off The rectifier has no AC power input. The rectifier is faulty. On 2s and off 2s On 250 ms and off 250 ms The rectifier is being queried. The rectifier is loading an application program. Alarm indicator Yellow Off No alarm is generated. Steady on The rectifier generates an alarm for power limiting due to ambient overtemperature. The rectifier generates an alarm for shutdown due to ambient overtemperature or undertemperature. The rectifier protects against AC input overvoltage or undervoltage. The rectifier is hibernating. On 2s and off 2s The communication between the rectifier and the SMU is interrupted. Fault indicator Red Off The rectifier is running properly. Steady on The rectifier locks out due to output overvoltage. The rectifier has no output due to an internal fault. Table Indicators for the monitoring module Indicat or Indicatio n Color Normal State Abnorm al State Cause of Exception RUN Running indicator Green Blinking at 1s internals Off Blinking at 125 ms internals The monitoring module is running abnormally. Abnormal communication ALM Alarm indicator Red Off On The ETP AF reports an alarm. 250

262 10 Equipment Support Buttons Table describes the buttons on the panel of the monitoring module. Table Button description Button Name Description or Up or Down Back Enter Allows you to view menu items and set the value of a menu item. Returns to the previous menu without saving the settings. Enters the main menu from the standby screen. Enters a submenu from the main menu. Saves the menu settings. Note: The standby screen is displayed and the LCD screen becomes dark if you do not press any button for 5 minutes. You need to log in again to enter the control and setting menus if you do not press any button for 8 minutes. Interfaces Table lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the ETP AF. Table Interfaces on the front panel of the ETP AF Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces Interface Type Description Remarks AC INPUT V AC power input interface - 251

263 10 Equipment Support Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces Interface Type Description Remarks RS232/RS485 2 RJ-45 RS232/RS485 communication interfaces. The monitoring module communicates with the equipment, reports alarms, and implements remote control through these interfaces. The interface on the left is the active interface and the interface on the right is the standby interface. The active and standby interfaces cannot be used at the same time. COM 1 DB50 The monitoring module is connected to various sensors through the COM interface. Reserved interfaces Reserved interface LOAD1 1 - Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC LOAD2 1 - Output interface for load 2 power for two PIUs. For how to connect the load interfaces to the PIUs, see the Installation Guide. BATT 1 - Interface for connecting to the storage batteries The pins marked with + and - are connected to the 48V+ and 48Vpoles of the cable connector respectively. Table lists the relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and fuses. ALM1 1 - Dry contact output 1 Mains Fault, DC Over Volt, DC Under Volt, Batt Off, Batt Loop Trip, Rect Fault, Load Fuse Trip Alarm severity: Major ALM2 1 - Dry contact output 2 AC Over Volt, AC Under Volt, Amb. Over Temp1, Amb. Under Temp1, Batt Over Temp, Batt Under Temp, Rect Protect, Rect Comm Fail, Batt Over Curr, Dig. Input1 ALM, Dig. Input2 ALM, Batt Discharge ALM3 1 - Dry contact output 3 - Alarm severity: Minor 252

264 10 Equipment Support Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces Interface Type Description Remarks ALM4 1 - Dry contact output 4 - Output branch fuses There are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the ETP AF. The fuses disable/ enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the load and storage batteries. Table Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage batteries, and fuses Output Branch Fuse Load Branch FU-1 (20 A) LOAD1 (20 A) FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A) FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A) Technical Specifications Table lists the technical specifications of the ETP AF. Table Technical specifications of the ETP AF Categor y Environ mental conditio ns Item Operating temperature Transportation temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Altitude Specifications -40ºC to +70ºC NOTE The system can run for 8 hours at 70ºC. -40ºC to +70ºC -40ºC to +70ºC 5%-95% m When the altitude ranges from 2000 m to 4000 m, the operating temperature decreases by 1ºC for each additional 200 m. 253

265 10 Equipment Support Categor y Item Specifications AC input Input mode Single-phase three-wire (L, N, PE) Battery input DC output Input voltage Input frequency Power factor Maximum efficiency of the rectifier module Rated input voltage Capacity Number of batteries Output voltage range Default output voltage V AC (rated voltage: 220 V AC) Hz (rated frequency: 50/60 Hz) 0.99 (100% load) 94% 48 V 40 Ah 4-42 V DC V DC V DC Output current FU-1 (20 A) FU-2 (20 A) FU-BT (20 A) Maximum power output Regulated voltage precision Peak-to-peak noise voltage Structure Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Protection level Installation mode 2000 W (input voltage: 176 V AC to 300 V AC); 940 W (input voltage: 85 V AC to 175 V AC) NOTE Number of rectifiers multiplied by the output power of a single rectifier ±0.6% 200 mv (0 20 MHz) 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm 10 kg (with rectifiers) IP20 Adapts to 19-inch cabinets and ETSI cabinets by using different types of mounting ears 254

266 10 Equipment Support Categor y Item Maintenance mode Cooling mode Dimensions of a battery Specifications Maintained from the front air cooling, with two fans embedded 170 mm (H) x 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D) ETP4830-B1A2 Power System Appearance The ETP4830-B1A2 external power system converts input 220 V AC power to V DC power and supplies power to the NE. Figure shows the appearance and structure of an ETP4830-B1A2. Figure Appearance of an ETP4830-B1A2 AC/DC power distribution frame Rectifier module Indicators Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the ETP4830- B1A2. Table lists the indications of indicators for the rectifier modules respectively. Table Indicators for the rectifier modules Indicator Color Status Description Power indicator Green Steady on The rectifier has an AC power input. Off The rectifier has no AC power input. The rectifier is faulty. 255

267 10 Equipment Support Indicator Color Status Description Alarm indicator Yellow Blinking No alarm is generated. Steady on The rectifier generates an alarm for power limiting due to ambient overtemperature. The rectifier generates an alarm for shutdown due to ambient overtemperature or undertemperature. The rectifier protects against AC input overvoltage or undervoltage. The rectifier is hibernating. Fault indicator Red Off The rectifier is running properly. Steady on The rectifier locks out due to output overvoltage. The rectifier has no output due to an internal fault. Interfaces and Air breakers Table lists types and usage of the interfaces and air breakers on the front panel of the ETP4830-B1A2. Figure shows the relationships of the AC input interfaces, load output interfaces, and air breakers. Table Interfaces and air breakers on the front panel of the ETP4830-B1A2 Interface Name Numb er of Interfa ces Type Description Remarks AC INPUT1 1 Interface 220 V AC power input interface AC INPUT2 1 Interface 220 V AC power input interface - - LOAD1 1 Air breaker Air breaker for load 1 - LOAD2 1 Air breaker Air breaker for load 2 - LOAD1 1 Interface Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC LOAD2 1 Interface Output interface for load 2 power for two PIUs. For how to connect the load interfaces to the PIUs. 256

268 10 Equipment Support Figure Relationships of the AC input interfaces, load output interfaces, and air breakers ETP4830 Load1 Load2 Rectifier module RTN+ -48V RTN+ -48V C14 AC INPUT1 AC INPUT2 Technical Specifications Table lists the technical specifications of the ETP4830-B1A2. Table Technical specifications of the ETP4830-B1A2 Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Specifications 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm 10 kg (with rectifiers) AC input Input lines 2 Rated voltage Voltage range Maximum current 110 V AC or 220 V AC V AC V AC 4.9 A DC output Output lines 2 Default output voltage V DC Maximum current Environmental conditions 8.6 A ( V AC) 12 A ( V AC) -40ºC to +65ºC S48D Power System Appearance The 27S48D power system converts input +24 V DC power to V DC power and supplies power to the NE. Figure shows the appearance of a 27S48D power system. 257

269 10 Equipment Support Figure Appearance of a 27S48D power system Functions The 27S48D power system accepts power in the range of 19 V to 30 V, and outputs V rated voltage and 7 A rated current. In terms of electrical performance and structure, the 27S48D power system is divided into two independent V/5.6 A power modules. They are separated using an output diode and installed in the same cabinet. Their currents are combined into a 7 A one through power distribution, and the 7 A current is supplied to equipment. The 27S48D power system provides functions such as short-circuit protection, overcurrent protection, output overvoltage protection, and overheat protection. Indicator Table lists the meaning of each 27S48D power indicator status. Table Indicator description Indicator Color Normal State Description RUN Green On When the module receives 24 V power, the indicator is on and green. STAND-BY Yellow Off When there is no output power, the indicator is on and yellow. ALM Red Off When protection is triggered or a fault occurs, the indicator is on and red. Interface Table lists the types and functions of 27S48D power interfaces. Table Description of 27S48D power interfaces Interface Name Quant ity Description Remarks INPUT 2 24 V DC power input interface Each power module has one input interface to receive power independently. 258

270 10 Equipment Support Interface Name Quant ity Description Remarks OUTPUT 6-48 V DC power output interface Two terminals are used: NEG(-) and RTN(+). There are altogether six power outputs. ALM 1 Alarm output terminal Dry contact output: off (abnormal) or on (normal) Technical Specifications Table lists the technical specifications of the 27S48D power system. Table Technical specifications of the 27S48D power system Item Value DC power supply Rated input voltage 24 V (19 V to 30 V) DC DC power supply Maximum input current Rated output voltage Output current 20 A V DC 7 A Dimensions (with mounting ears) (H x W x D) Weight 43.4 mm x mm x 244 mm < 7 kg HW AC14D-1 Power System Appearance The HW AC14D-1 power system receives and converts 110 V or 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power for the NE. Figure shows the appearance of the HW AC14D-1 power system. 259

271 10 Equipment Support Figure Appearance of the HW AC14D-1 power system Functions The HW AC14D-1 power system supports AC power ranging from 90 V to 264 V, and outputs -48 V DC power in natural heat dissipation mode. The output power is 100 W. This power system supports protection against output overcurrent, output undervoltage, output short circuit, and overtemperature. Technical Specifications Table provides the technical specifications of the HW AC14D-1 power system. Table Technical specification of the HW AC14D-1 power system Item Specifications AC power input Rated input voltage 100/220 V (100 V to 240 V) AC DC output Maximum input current Rated output voltage Rated output power 2 A -48 V DC 100 W Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight 40 mm x 171 mm x 72 mm < 1 kg 260

272 10 Equipment Support Item Ambient temperature Specifications -20 C (68ºF) to +40 C (122ºF) (maximum output power: 100 W) -20 C (68ºF) to +50 C (122ºF) (maximum output power: 70 W) NOTE Do not put the HW AC14D-1 power system on the surface of an overheated device or close to the air exhaust vent, ensuring the ambient temperature of the power system is no higher than 50 C (122ºF) Lead-Acid Battery The NE use valve regulated lead-acid batteries to provide backup power. Appearance Figure shows the appearance of a lead-acid battery. Figure Appearance of a lead-acid battery NOTE The appearance, dimensions, and weight of lead-acid batteries are provided only for reference and those of the delivered batteries prevail. Technical Specifications Table shows the technical specifications of the lead-acid battery. Table Technical specifications of the lead-acid battery Item Rated working voltage (four batteries cascaded in a group) Specifications -48 V DC 261

Hardware Guide. EPIC Next Generation Firewall. USG6000 Unified Security Gateway V100R001. Give us a call:

Hardware Guide. EPIC Next Generation Firewall. USG6000 Unified Security Gateway V100R001. Give us a call: EPIC Next Generation Firewall USG6000 Unified Security Gateway V100R001 15333 Avenue of Science, Suite 100 San Diego, CA 92128 Give us a call: 1-855-881-2004 Send us an email: info@edgewave.com For more

More information

Operation Guide for Security NEs Management

Operation Guide for Security NEs Management imanager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for Security NEs Management Issue 03 Date 2010-11-19 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this

More information

BGP/MPLS VPN Technical White Paper

BGP/MPLS VPN Technical White Paper V300R001C10 BGP/MPLS VPN Technical White Paper Issue 01 Date 2013-12-10 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or

More information

NE08E&NE05E Series Low-speed Service Interface Boards

NE08E&NE05E Series Low-speed Service Interface Boards NE08E&NE05E Series Low-speed Service Interface Boards Product Overview The Huawei NE08E&NE05E series routers support E1/T1, STM-1/POS and PCM service low-speed interface boards (as shown in the Figure

More information

H3C S7500E Series Ethernet Switches

H3C S7500E Series Ethernet Switches Installation Manual Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co., Ltd. http://www.h3c.com Manual Version: T2-080406-20080725-C-1.04 Copyright 2007-2008, Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved No part

More information

Nortel Secure Router Hardware Description Release: Document Revision: NN A

Nortel Secure Router Hardware Description Release: Document Revision:   NN A Release: Document Revision: 5.3 01.03 www.nortel.com NN46240-303 324566-A Release: 5.3 Publication: NN46240-303 Document Revision: 01.03 Document status: Standard Document release date: 6 April 2009 Copyright

More information

esight V300R001C10 SLA Technical White Paper Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

esight V300R001C10 SLA Technical White Paper Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V300R001C10 Issue 01 Date 2013-12-10 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

More information

Energy Saving Technology White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01. Date

Energy Saving Technology White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01. Date Energy Saving Technology White Paper Issue 01 Date 2012-08-13 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means

More information

Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches V100R006C01. Configuration Guide - Ethernet. Issue 02 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches V100R006C01. Configuration Guide - Ethernet. Issue 02 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V100R006C01 Issue 02 Date 2011-11-21 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

More information

NE20E-S Series Network Service Processor

NE20E-S Series Network Service Processor NE20E-S Series Network Service Processor Product Overview The Huawei NE20E-S Series Network Services Processors (NSPs) handle all the network data-plane traffic-processing tasks of Huawei NE20E-S series

More information

SUN2000P-375 W Smart PV Optimizer. User Manual. Issue 01. Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

SUN2000P-375 W Smart PV Optimizer. User Manual. Issue 01. Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01 Date 2017-08-01 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2017. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of

More information

Nortel Secure Router 8002, 8004 and Hardware Description Release: Document Revision: NN A

Nortel Secure Router 8002, 8004 and Hardware Description Release: Document Revision:  NN A Release: Document Revision: 5.3 01.03 www.nortel.com NN46240-302 324565-A Release: 5.3 Publication: NN46240-302 Document Revision: 01.03 Document status: Standard Document release date: 6 April 2009 Copyright

More information

SmartAX MA5821/MA5822 V800R016C10

SmartAX MA5821/MA5822 V800R016C10 SmartAX / V800R016C10 Product Overview The SmartAX / is a multi-service access module launched by Huawei Technologies Co, Ltd. The / applies to fiber to the building (FTTB) or fiber to the curb (FTTC)

More information

S Series Switch. Cisco HSRP Replacement. Issue 01. Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

S Series Switch. Cisco HSRP Replacement. Issue 01. Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Cisco HSRP Replacement Issue 01 Date 2013-08-05 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior

More information

Huawei MZ110 NIC V100R001. White Paper. Issue 07 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Huawei MZ110 NIC V100R001. White Paper. Issue 07 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V100R001 Issue 07 Date 2016-11-21 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2016. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent

More information

DRH Hardware Maintenance Guide

DRH Hardware Maintenance Guide Issue 1.0 Date 2013-04-10 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of

More information

EchoLife ONT GPON Terminal V300R013C10. Product Description. Issue 03. Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

EchoLife ONT GPON Terminal V300R013C10. Product Description. Issue 03. Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V300R013C10 Issue 03 Date 2014-04-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

More information

Huawei NE08E & NE05E series ENP Based Cloud Era Mid Service Router Product Brochure Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei NE08E & NE05E series ENP Based Cloud Era Mid Service Router Product Brochure Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei NE08E & NE05E series ENP Based Cloud Era Mid Service Router Product Brochure Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Product Overview Huawei NetEngine08E / NetEngine05E series is the cloud era ENP Based Mid

More information

CVH Slot Media Converter Chassis Quick Installation Guide

CVH Slot Media Converter Chassis Quick Installation Guide CVH-2000 14-Slot Media Converter Chassis Quick Installation Guide Ver. 1.2-1305 Table of Contents 1. INTRODUCTION... 1 1.1. FEATURES... 1 1.2. PACKAGE CONTENTS... 1 2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION... 2 REAL PANEL...

More information

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. HUAWEI FusionServer X6000 High-Density Server

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. HUAWEI FusionServer X6000 High-Density Server HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. HUAWEI FusionServer X6000 High-Density Server HUAWEI FusionServer X6000 High-Density Server High computing density The X6000 is 2U high and features a centralized power supply

More information

MACH100 19" Industrial Workgroup Rack-Mount Switches

MACH100 19 Industrial Workgroup Rack-Mount Switches MACH100 19" Industrial Workgroup Rack-Mount Switches Fast Ethernet Uplink Ports, Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Ports, and 10 Gigabit Uplink Ports The MACH100 series of switches are offered in versions with 8,

More information

FVT Slot Media Converter Chassis w/ Redundant Power User Manual

FVT Slot Media Converter Chassis w/ Redundant Power User Manual FVT-4000 10-Slot Media Converter Chassis w/ Redundant Power User Manual Ver. 1.00-0609 Table of Contents 1. INTRODUCTION... 1 1.1. FEATURES... 1 1.2. PACKAGE CONTENTS... 2 2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION... 3

More information

Quick Start Guide. AR530&AR550 Series Industrial Switching Routers. Issue: 07 ( ) Part number: HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.

Quick Start Guide. AR530&AR550 Series Industrial Switching Routers. Issue: 07 ( ) Part number: HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO. Quick Start Guide AR0&AR0 Series Industrial Switching Routers Issue: 0 (0--0) Part number: 0 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD Packing List AR0 series industrial switching router (with the product model on

More information

INDUSTRIAL POE SWITCH

INDUSTRIAL POE SWITCH STEP X - Name of Step QUICK START GUIDE LIE1014A, LIE1080A, LIE1082A INDUSTRIAL POE SWITCH 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT AT 877.877.2269 OR VISIT BLACKBOX.COM STEP 1 - Hardware Description LIE1014A LIE1080A TABLE

More information

Overview. Port Adapter Overview. Channelized T1/E1 Overview CHAPTER

Overview. Port Adapter Overview. Channelized T1/E1 Overview CHAPTER CHAPTER This chapter describes the PA-MC-8TE+ port adapter and contains the following sections: Port Adapter, page - Channelized T/E, page - Features, page - LEDs, page - Cables, Connectors, and Pinouts,

More information

Overview. Port Adapter Overview CHAPTER

Overview. Port Adapter Overview CHAPTER CHAPTER This chapter describes the PA-A-IMA port adapter and contains the following sections: Port Adapter, page - Inverse Multiplexing over ATM, page - Features, page - LEDs, page - Cables, Connectors,

More information

Industrial Serial RS-232 to Fiber Converter. KSC-200 Series. Installation Guide

Industrial Serial RS-232 to Fiber Converter. KSC-200 Series. Installation Guide Industrial Serial RS-232 to Fiber Converter KSC-200 Series Installation Guide DOC.100803-KSC-200-1- (C) 2006 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any

More information

S9700 Core Routing Switch V200R001C00. Configuration Guide - EPON. Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

S9700 Core Routing Switch V200R001C00. Configuration Guide - EPON. Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V200R001C00 Issue 01 Date 2012-03-15 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

More information

Installing the ASA 5550

Installing the ASA 5550 CHAPTER 3 Installing the ASA 5550 Caution Read the safety warnings in the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco ASA 5500 Series and follow proper safety procedures when performing

More information

HG531 V1 300Mbps Wireless ADSL2+ Router Product Description. Issue _01 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

HG531 V1 300Mbps Wireless ADSL2+ Router Product Description. Issue _01 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. HG531 V1 300Mbps Wireless ADSL2+ Router Issue 203275_01 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted

More information

HUAWEI AR Series SEP Technical White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 1.0. Date

HUAWEI AR Series SEP Technical White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 1.0. Date HUAWEI AR Series SEP Technical White Paper Issue 1.0 Date 2015-01-19 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by

More information

Optimux-34 Fiber Optic Multiplexer

Optimux-34 Fiber Optic Multiplexer Data Sheet Optimux-34 Multiple E1, Ethernet, or High-speed Data over E3 or Fiber, up to 110 km (68 miles) Up to 16 E1 links, high-speed data, and Ethernet traffic multiplexed into one E3 copper or fiber

More information

espace UMS V100R001C01SPC100 Product Description Issue 03 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

espace UMS V100R001C01SPC100 Product Description Issue 03 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V100R001C01SPC100 Issue 03 Date 2012-07-10 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. . 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior

More information

Numerics INDEX. cables caution 1-19 cabling

Numerics INDEX. cables caution 1-19 cabling INDEX Numerics 10/100/1000 PoE ports numbering 1-3, 1-4 pinouts B-2 recommended cables 2-25 10/100/1000 ports cabling 1-6 connecting to 2-26 numbering 1-2 overview 1-6 10/100 and 10/100/1000 PoE+ Port

More information

16-SLOT IN-BAND MANAGEMENT CHASSIS

16-SLOT IN-BAND MANAGEMENT CHASSIS FCM-CHS2-XX 16-SLOT IN-BAND MANAGEMENT CHASSIS User's Guide. Version 1.6 FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15

More information

Installing the Cisco AS5400XM Universal Gateway

Installing the Cisco AS5400XM Universal Gateway CHAPTER 3 Installing the Cisco AS5400XM Universal Gateway This chapter guides you through the installation of the Cisco AS5400XM universal gateway and includes the following sections: Setting Up the Chassis,

More information

Nortel Secure Router 2330/4134 Installation Hardware Components. Release: 10.2 Document Revision:

Nortel Secure Router 2330/4134 Installation Hardware Components. Release: 10.2 Document Revision: Installation Hardware Components Release: 10.2 Document Revision: 03.01 www.nortel.com NN47263-301. . Release: 10.2 Publication: NN47263-301 Document release date: 7 September 2009 While the information

More information

Optimux-34, Optimux-25

Optimux-34, Optimux-25 Data Sheet Optimux-34, Optimux-25 16-Channel E1/T1, Ethernet or Data over E3 or Fiber Multiplexers Up to 16 E1/T1 links and high-speed data or Ethernet traffic multiplexed into fiber opt7ic uplink E3 copper

More information

Overview. Port Adapter Overview CHAPTER

Overview. Port Adapter Overview CHAPTER CHAPTER This chapter describes the PA-MC-E/ and PA-MC-8E/ port adapters and contains the following sections: Port Adapter, page - Features, page -4 Compliance and Electrical Interface Specifications for

More information

MS400870M. User's Guide. Ver.: Port GBE SFP Switch 19 1U 24x10/100/1000T Combo 10/1000X SFP

MS400870M. User's Guide. Ver.: Port GBE SFP Switch 19 1U 24x10/100/1000T Combo 10/1000X SFP MS400870M 24 Port GBE SFP Switch 19 1U 24x10/100/1000T Combo 10/1000X SFP User's Guide. Ver.:0.91 1 CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference

More information

VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment

VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment Data Sheet Copyright: Valiant Communications Limited. - 2013 1 Product Overview VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment is an extremely reliable and flexible product that offers

More information

Installation Job Aid for VSP 4850GTS

Installation Job Aid for VSP 4850GTS Installation Job Aid for VSP 4850GTS Notices Release 6.1.0.0 NN46251-308 Issue 02.01 November 2017 Notice paragraphs alert you about issues that require your attention. The following paragraphs describe

More information

Overview. Cisco ASR 920 Router Features

Overview. Cisco ASR 920 Router Features The Cisco ASR-920-12SZ-IM and Cisco ASR-920U-12SZ-IM are collectively referred to as the Cisco ASR-920-12SZ-IM Router in this document. Any differences between the routers are specifically called out.

More information

Huawei esight LogCenter Technical White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 1.0. Date PUBLIC

Huawei esight LogCenter Technical White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 1.0. Date PUBLIC Huawei esight LogCenter Technical White Paper Issue 1.0 Date 2013-12-03 PUBLIC HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any

More information

Prisma II Platform. Optoelectronics

Prisma II Platform. Optoelectronics Optoelectronics Prisma II Platform Description In optical transmission systems, the network platform forms the foundation of the product family. The Prisma II platform provides network operators with the

More information

Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports. Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-P. Installation Guide

Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports. Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-P. Installation Guide Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-P Installation Guide DOC.080104-1- (C) 2008 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved.

More information

Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches. with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports. Basic Model: KSD-541. PoE Model: KSD-541-HP. Installation Guide

Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches. with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports. Basic Model: KSD-541. PoE Model: KSD-541-HP. Installation Guide Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-HP Installation Guide DOC.141201-1- (C) 2014 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved.

More information

Installation Job Aid for VSP 4450GTX-HT- PWR+

Installation Job Aid for VSP 4450GTX-HT- PWR+ Installation Job Aid for VSP 4450GTX-HT- PWR+ Notices Release 6.1.0.0 NN46251-305 Issue 02.01 November 2017 Notice paragraphs alert you about issues that require your attention. The following paragraphs

More information

PoE Powered Gigabit Ethernet Media Converters 1000BASE-T TO 1000BASE-SX/LX. KGC-352 Series. Installation Guide

PoE Powered Gigabit Ethernet Media Converters 1000BASE-T TO 1000BASE-SX/LX. KGC-352 Series. Installation Guide PoE Powered Gigabit Ethernet Media Converters 1000BASE-T TO 1000BASE-SX/LX KGC-352 Series Installation Guide DOC.070820-KGC-352-1- (C) 2007 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation

More information

6 / 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet Switch with PoE+ optional with 2x SFP Slots

6 / 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet Switch with PoE+ optional with 2x SFP Slots Product Overview 6 / 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet Switch with PoE+ optional with 2x SFP Slots Description Unmanaged Industrial PoE Ethernet switch with P.S.E. function. The MS655203PX switch supports Power-over-

More information

NetBackup 5000 Release Routine Maintenance. Issue 01. Date Symantec Corporation

NetBackup 5000 Release Routine Maintenance. Issue 01. Date Symantec Corporation NetBackup 5000 Release 6.6.0.2 Issue 01 Date 2010-03-26 Symantec Corporation Symantec provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office

More information

Device Server for the conversion of serial interfaces (RS-232/422/485) to IP.

Device Server for the conversion of serial interfaces (RS-232/422/485) to IP. Manual Entry Line Industrial Gigabit Ethernet Switch 4x 10/100/1000Base-T, 1x SFP Ports MICROSENS General The IP protocol has already left the in-house environment and is going to take all remaining communication

More information

Product Overview. Cisco ME 6524 Ethernet Switch (ME-C6524GS-8S) CHAPTER

Product Overview. Cisco ME 6524 Ethernet Switch (ME-C6524GS-8S) CHAPTER 2 7 CHAPTER This chapter describes the Cisco ME 00 series Ethernet switches and contains these sections: Cisco ME 2 Ethernet Switch (ME-C2GS-8S), page - Cisco ME 2 Ethernet Switch (ME-C2GT-8S), page -7

More information

Huawei NE08E & NE05E series ENP Based Cloud Era Mid Service Router Product

Huawei NE08E & NE05E series ENP Based Cloud Era Mid Service Router Product Huawei 08E & 05E series ENP Based Cloud Era Mid Service Router Product Huawei NetEngine08E / NetEngine05E series is the cloud era ENP Based Mid Services Router which is to help transportation, finance,

More information

VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment With Trip Counter Display Panel

VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment With Trip Counter Display Panel VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment With Trip Counter Display Panel Data Sheet Copyright: Valiant Communications Limited. 2008-2014 1 Product Overview VCL-TP, Teleprotection Equipment is an extremely reliable

More information

Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches V100R006C01. Configuration Guide - VPN. Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches V100R006C01. Configuration Guide - VPN. Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V100R006C01 Issue 01 Date 2011-11-21 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

More information

PoE Powered 10/100BASE-TX to 100BASE-FX Media Converters. KC-351 Series. Installation Guide

PoE Powered 10/100BASE-TX to 100BASE-FX Media Converters. KC-351 Series. Installation Guide PoE Powered 10/100BASE-TX to 100BASE-FX Media Converters KC-351 Series Installation Guide -1- DOC.070820-KC-351 (C) 2007 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced

More information

Huawei OceanStor ReplicationDirector Software Technical White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01. Date

Huawei OceanStor ReplicationDirector Software Technical White Paper HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01. Date Huawei OceanStor Software Issue 01 Date 2015-01-17 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without

More information

Cisco CRS-1 Carrier Routing System

Cisco CRS-1 Carrier Routing System CHAPTER This site planning guide describes how to plan and prepare your site facilities for the installation of a 8-Slot Line Card Chassis (also referred to in this document as the Cisco CRS- 8-slot line

More information

SS7 Q.703 High Speed Port Adapter Product Overview

SS7 Q.703 High Speed Port Adapter Product Overview CHAPTER 1 SS7 Q.703 High Speed Port Adapter Product Overview This chapter describes the SS7 Q.703 High Speed Port Adapter and contains the following sections: SS7 Q.703 High Speed Port Adapter Product

More information

Anti-DDoS. FAQs. Issue 11 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Anti-DDoS. FAQs. Issue 11 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 11 Date 2018-05-28 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

More information

AN B Optical Line Terminal Equipment. Hardware Description. Version A. Code: MN FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

AN B Optical Line Terminal Equipment. Hardware Description. Version A. Code: MN FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. AN5116-06B Optical Line Terminal Equipment Hardware Description Version A Code: MN000000067 FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. January 2010 Thank you for choosing our products. We appreciate

More information

be used in SDH, MEF CE2.0, or MPLS-TP networks, thus meeting requirements for accessing and transmitting traditional transmission services in U&T

be used in SDH, MEF CE2.0, or MPLS-TP networks, thus meeting requirements for accessing and transmitting traditional transmission services in U&T Compact, High-Capacity, Hybrid Multi-Service Transport Platform The itn221, a 1.5U high Hybrid Multi-Service Transport Platform, is a powerful product aiming to assist packetrization migrations. It has

More information

FB-10/100MMC Series Managed/Unmanaged. 10/100Mbps Fiber Media Converter User Manual

FB-10/100MMC Series Managed/Unmanaged. 10/100Mbps Fiber Media Converter User Manual FB-10/100MMC Series Managed/Unmanaged 10/100Mbps Fiber Media Converter User Manual (Version 1.5) Beijing Fibridge Co., Ltd. Content 1. Overview... 3 2. Features... 3 2.1. Hardware Features... 3 2.2. Software

More information

CSR-G6300 6U Rack Chassis. CSR-G3300 3U Rack Chassis. Operation Manual

CSR-G6300 6U Rack Chassis. CSR-G3300 3U Rack Chassis. Operation Manual CSR-G6300 6U Rack Chassis CSR-G3300 3U Rack Chassis Operation Manual DISCLAIMERS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. Cypress Technology assumes no

More information

Datasheet Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE

Datasheet Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE High-Performance GPON Configuring a fiber network just became as

More information

Optimux-1032, Optimux-1025

Optimux-1032, Optimux-1025 Where to buy > Product page > Data Sheet Optimux-1032, Optimux-1025 Fiber Optic Multiplexer for 16 E1/T1 and Gigabit Ethernet Multiplexes up to 16 E1/T1 with up to 3x10/100/1000 user Ethernet traffic over

More information

Installation Manual. Table of Contents

Installation Manual. Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents... 1-1 1.1 Introduction... 1-1 1.1.1 Introduction to S7500 Series Ethernet Switches... 1-1 1.1.2 Introduction to Switching Engines... 1-2 1.2 Technical Specifications

More information

H3C S9500E Routing Switch Series GE Electrical Interface Card Datasheet

H3C S9500E Routing Switch Series GE Electrical Interface Card Datasheet H3C S9500E Routing Switch Series GE Electrical Interface Card Datasheet Copyright 2012 Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in

More information

S6700 Series Ethernet Switches. Hardware Description. Issue 08 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

S6700 Series Ethernet Switches. Hardware Description. Issue 08 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 08 Date 2014-03-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of

More information

Datasheet Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE

Datasheet Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE High-Performance GPON Configuring a fiber network just became as

More information

PT-7728/7828 Quick Installation Guide

PT-7728/7828 Quick Installation Guide PT-7728/7828 Quick Installation Guide Moxa PowerTrans Switch Edition 9.0, April 2017 Technical Support Contact Information www.moxa.com/support Moxa Americas: Toll-free: 1-888-669-2872 Tel: 1-714-528-6777

More information

Gmux Modular TDMoIP Gateway FEATURES

Gmux Modular TDMoIP Gateway FEATURES FEATURES Carrier-class modular TDMoIP gateway, extending high capacity TDM traffic over packet-switched networks (PSNs) Operates opposite other members of RAD s TDMoIP family of products, offering a complete

More information

OceanStor 9000 InfiniBand Technical White Paper. Issue V1.01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

OceanStor 9000 InfiniBand Technical White Paper. Issue V1.01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. OceanStor 9000 Issue V1.01 Date 2014-03-29 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in

More information

AD SSO Technical White Paper

AD SSO Technical White Paper Issue V1.0 Date 2017-02-28 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of

More information

FCD-155. STM-1/OC-3 Terminal Multiplexer FEATURES

FCD-155. STM-1/OC-3 Terminal Multiplexer FEATURES FEATURES SDH/SONET terminal multiplexer for grooming LAN and legacy traffic (TDM) over SDH/SONET networks Demarcation point between the carrier and the customer networks GFP (G.7041), LAPS (X.85/86) encapsulation

More information

INDUSTRIAL 1000BASE-T TO 1000BASE-X MEDIA CONVERTERS. KCD-400 Series. Installation Guide

INDUSTRIAL 1000BASE-T TO 1000BASE-X MEDIA CONVERTERS. KCD-400 Series. Installation Guide INDUSTRIAL 1000BASE-T TO 1000BASE-X MEDIA CONVERTERS KCD-400 Series Installation Guide DOC.060227-KCD-400-1- (C) 2005 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced

More information

Datasheet. Gigabit Passive Optical Network. Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano, UF-LOCO. GPON End-to-End Solution. High-Performance, Provider OLT

Datasheet. Gigabit Passive Optical Network. Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano, UF-LOCO. GPON End-to-End Solution. High-Performance, Provider OLT Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano, UF-LOCO GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE High-Performance GPON Configuring a fiber network just

More information

Datasheet. Gigabit Passive Optical Network. Models: UF-OLT, UF-OLT-4, UF-Nano, UF-LOCO. GPON End-to-End Solution. High-Performance, Provider OLT

Datasheet. Gigabit Passive Optical Network. Models: UF-OLT, UF-OLT-4, UF-Nano, UF-LOCO. GPON End-to-End Solution. High-Performance, Provider OLT Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-OLT-4, UF-Nano, UF-LOCO GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE High-Performance GPON Configuring a fiber network

More information

Industrial 3-Port Fast Ethernet Media Converter Switches

Industrial 3-Port Fast Ethernet Media Converter Switches Industrial 3-Port Fast Ethernet Media Converter Switches KSD-103-A series KSD-103-B series Installation Guide DOC.081111 1/20 (C) 2008 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation

More information

Quick Start Guide. C-100 Series Switches

Quick Start Guide. C-100 Series Switches Quick Start Guide C-100 Series Switches C-100 SERIES QUICK START GUIDE Warnings and Cautionary Messages!! Warning: This product does not contain any serviceable user parts. Warning: Installation and removal

More information

esight V300R001C10 WLAN Technical White Paper Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

esight V300R001C10 WLAN Technical White Paper Issue 01 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V300R001C10 Issue 01 Date 2013-12-10 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

More information

Quidway S2700 Series Enterprise Switches

Quidway S2700 Series Enterprise Switches Quidway S2700 Series Enterprise Switches Quidway S2700 Series Enterprise Switches Product Overview The Quidway S2700 enterprise switches (S2700 for short) are next-generation energy-saving 100M Ethernet

More information

ICPDAS FSM-510G Series Ethernet Management Switch Quick Start

ICPDAS FSM-510G Series Ethernet Management Switch Quick Start ICPDAS FSM-510G Series Ethernet Management Switch Quick Start Version 1.0, Dec 2014 Overview The Management Ethernet Switch solutions are designed for supporting standard industrial applications. Managed

More information

Huawei MZ912 NIC V100R001. White Paper. Issue 07 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Huawei MZ912 NIC V100R001. White Paper. Issue 07 Date HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. V100R001 Issue 07 Date 2016-11-22 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2016. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent

More information

Signamax Connectivity Systems Industrial 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet Extender

Signamax Connectivity Systems Industrial 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet Extender Signamax Connectivity Systems Industrial 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet Extender U S E R S G U I D E Signamax Connectivity Systems Industrial Ethernet Extender Model 065-1167A User s Guide FCC Warning This equipment

More information

Manual Version: V1.00. Video Decoder Quick Guide

Manual Version: V1.00. Video Decoder Quick Guide Manual Version: V1.00 Video Decoder Quick Guide Thank you for purchasing our product. If there are any questions, or requests, please do not hesitate to contact the dealer. Copyright Copyright 2016 Zhejiang

More information

Overview of the Cisco VG224 Voice Gateway

Overview of the Cisco VG224 Voice Gateway CHAPTER 1 This chapter provides a brief description of the Cisco VG224 voice gateway (VG) and contains the following sections: Overview, page 1-1 Cisco VG224 Voice Gateway Deployment, page 1-4 Interfaces

More information

Gigabit Ethernet Switch With 10G Uplinks. Hardware Manual MS400860M

Gigabit Ethernet Switch With 10G Uplinks. Hardware Manual MS400860M Gigabit Ethernet Switch With 10G Uplinks Hardware Manual MS400860M Gigabit Ethernet Switch with 10G Uplinks Hardware Manual II About This Guide Purpose Audience Conventions This guide details the hardware

More information

Datasheet. Multi-Service Access Platform OPCOM3500E-12. OPCOM3500E-12 Feature. Raisecom Technology Co., Ltd.

Datasheet. Multi-Service Access Platform OPCOM3500E-12. OPCOM3500E-12 Feature. Raisecom Technology Co., Ltd. Multi-Service Access Platform OPCOM3500E-12 OPCOM3500E-12 Feature Overview OPCOM3500E MSAP is carrier-class Multi-Service Access Platform, and designed to enable establishment of service-integrated for

More information

Product Overview. Switch Models CHAPTER

Product Overview. Switch Models CHAPTER CHAPTER 1 The Cisco CGS 2520 switches, also referred to as the switch, are Ethernet switches that you can connect devices such as Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs), distributed controllers, substation

More information

espace SoftConsole V200R001C02 Product Description HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01 Date

espace SoftConsole V200R001C02 Product Description HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Issue 01 Date espace SoftConsole V200R001C02 Issue 01 Date 2012-07-10 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without

More information

SW-UNM-24FE2GC-24POE 24 Fast Ethernet Ports PoE + 2 Giga Combo User Manual Ver 1.1

SW-UNM-24FE2GC-24POE 24 Fast Ethernet Ports PoE + 2 Giga Combo User Manual Ver 1.1 SW-UNM-24FE2GC-24POE 24 Fast Ethernet Ports PoE + 2 Giga Combo User Manual Ver 1.1 Chapter 1 Product Introduction Congratulations on your purchasing of the PoE Ethernet Switch. Before you install and use

More information

Datasheet Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE

Datasheet Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE Gigabit Passive Optical Network Models: UF-OLT, UF-Nano GPON End-to-End Solution High-Performance, Provider OLT Low-Cost, Robust ONU CPE High-Performance GPON Introducing U Fiber from Ubiquiti Networks,

More information

HARTING econ 3000 Introduction and features

HARTING econ 3000 Introduction and features Introduction and features HARTING econ 3000 es, unmanaged, for installation in control cabinets General Description Features The Fast es of the product family HARTING econ 3000 are suitable for industrial

More information

DESCRIPTION. Features

DESCRIPTION. Features Multi-Ser vice Access Network Features Combined SONET - SDH ADM and E1/T1- PDH multiservice DACS 6U height, full front access (ETSI) shelf TM, ADM and DCS at DS0, VC12, VC3, VC4 Dual STM-1/4 - OC-3/12

More information

Cisco ASR 1001-X Router Overview

Cisco ASR 1001-X Router Overview The Cisco ASR 000 Series Aggregation Services Routers are mid-range edge routers that establish a new price-to-performance class offering benefits to both enterprise and service providers alike. The Cisco

More information

FSM-510G Series Ethernet Management Switch Quick Start Guide

FSM-510G Series Ethernet Management Switch Quick Start Guide FSM-510G Series Ethernet Management Switch Quick Start Guide Overview The Management Ethernet Switch solutions are designed for supporting standard industrial applications. Managed switches are easily

More information

KIEN2204S Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual

KIEN2204S Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual KIEN2204S Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual Kyland Technology Co., Ltd. Publication Date: Mar. 2013 Version: V1.0 FAX: +86-10-88796678 Website: http://www.kyland.com E-mail: support@kyland.com

More information

FCD-155. STM-1/OC-3 Terminal Multiplexer DESCRIPTION FEATURES

FCD-155. STM-1/OC-3 Terminal Multiplexer DESCRIPTION FEATURES DESCRIPTION FEATURES STM-1/OC-3 PDH/Ethernet terminal multiplexer for grooming LAN and legacy (TDM) traffic over SDH/SONET networks Ethernet traffic maps to: One VC-3/VC-4/STS-1 Up to 3 VC-3/STS-1 Up to

More information